1996 Ford Windstar Owners Manual

[PI00200(ALL)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050269-B

File:wnpis.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:27:27 1996

*[PI00300(ALL)03/95]

thirty-six pica

chart:0040299-A


*[PI01800(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Safety Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Starting Your Windstar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Warning Lights and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Electronic Sound Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving Your Windstar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Roadside Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Servicing Your Windstar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Quick Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Service Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00400(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuouscommitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedicationto learning what you want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, andattention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standardby which others are judged.

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ■ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of ourproducts and services must be our number one priority.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ■ You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must bedone with you in mind, providing better products andservices than our competition.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ■ Continuous improvement is essential to our success. Wemust strive for excellence in everything we do: in ourproducts — in their safety and value — and in our services,our human relations, our competitiveness, and ourprofitability.

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ■ Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team.We must treat one another with trust and respect.

*[IN01100(ALL)04/95] ■ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintainmutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, andour other business associates.

*[IN01200(ALL)04/95] ■ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwidemust be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible andcommands respect for its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

File:wnins.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:27:16 1996

2

*[IN01210(ALL)04/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide

*[IN01220(ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. Thisguide has information about the equipment and the options foryour new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know which information appliesto your vehicle, talk to your dealer.

*[IN01230(ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications forequipment that was in effect when this guide was approved forprinting. Ford may discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and without incurring obligation.

*[IN01240(ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01242(ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information about the subjectmatter you are referencing.

*[IN01244(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areaswhere carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle orpersonal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people.Please read all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01246(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

*[IN01250(ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01260(ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you will probably returnto it when you have a specific question or need additionalinformation. To help you find specific information quickly, youcan use the Quick Index or the Index.

*[IN01270(ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a pagenumber following each item which indicates where detailedinformation can be found.



3

*[IN01280(ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in thealphabetical listing for the word that best describes theinformation you need. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. We have designed theIndex so that you can find information under a technical term.

%*[IN01290(ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN01301(ALL)05/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or bywriting to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, ServicePublications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y4G3.

%*[IN01350(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and RecordBooklet

*[IN01450(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the servicesthat are most important for keeping your vehicle in goodcondition. A record log is also provided to help you keep trackof all services performed.

%*[IN01500(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN01600(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: BasicVehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, andEmissions Warranties.

%*[IN02000(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find outabout your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights andresponsibilities.

*[IN02200(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a newone free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer,or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.


4

%*[IN02800(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN02900(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a FordExtended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contractprovides service protection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN03000(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle.However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended ServicePlan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealerfor more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan.

*[IN03100(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not takeadvantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time ofpurchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for thedetails.

%*[IN04100(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN04200(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-inperiod during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it.During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention tohow you drive your vehicle.

%*[IN04300(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brakelinings, you should take these steps:

*[IN04400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when tostop.

*[IN04500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN04600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN04700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofhighway driving.



5

*[IN04800(ALL)12/93] ■ Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torquespecifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation.Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Alsoretighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 kmafter any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nutshave been loosened.

%*[IN04900(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. SeeEngine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special“break-in” oils.

*[IN05000(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Powertrain ControlModule that limits engine and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-outmode to promote durability.

%*[IN05001(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle%*[IN05101(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN05201(ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, witha mild detergent.

*[IN05301(ALL)04/95] DO NOT:

*[IN05401(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN05501(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight

*[IN05600(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN05700(ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint,especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often asnecessary to keep it clean.

*[IN05800(ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemicalindustrial fallout.


6

*[IN05900(ALL)05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect inpaint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvementin customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Fordhas authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental falloutwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase,whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative.

*[IN06000(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect thefinish.

%*[IN06100(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN06200(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Donot use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.

%*[IN06300(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN06400(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean witha tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner forroutine cleaning.

*[IN06500(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents orpetroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN06600(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayedrustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing isnot removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.


7

Safety Restraints

*[SR00400(ALL)06/95] Safety Belts

*[SR00500(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and yourpassengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada,the law requires their use. We strongly recommend that you usethem every time you travel in your vehicle.

*[SR00600(ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00700(ALL)01/95] ■ the seatback is upright

*[SR00800(ALL)01/95] ■ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR00900(ALL)01/95] ■ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01000(ALL)01/95] ■ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01100(ALL)01/95] ■ the knees are straight forward

*[SR01500(ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on howto properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints forChildren in this chapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

*[SR01600(ALL)03/95]RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengers, includingpregnant women, wear safety belts. Be sure that the lapbelt portion of your safety belt fits snugly and as low aspossible around the hips. If safety belts are not usedproperly, the risk of you or your passengers beinginjured in a collision greatly increases.

File:wnsrs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:27:08 1996

8


Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargoarea. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seatbelt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent itfrom shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harmto passengers.


Failure to follow these precautions could increase the riskand/or severity of injury in a collision. 1) Use theshoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wearthe shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing itaround your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never usea single belt for more than one person.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, alwaysdrive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,children should always ride with the seatback upright.


Safety Restraints

9


Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.

*[SR02200(ALL)03/95] RWARNING

Never use a single belt for more than one person oracross more than one seating position. This greatlyincreases the risk that one or both of the people will beinjured in a collision. Each seating position in yourvehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is madeup of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to beused as a pair.

*[SR02300(ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the riskof the door coming open in a collision.

*[SR02700(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts*[SR02800(ALL)06/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and

shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brakehard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduceyour forward movement.

*[SR02900(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Thenadjust the seat to the position that suits you best.


10

[SR03100(ALL)10/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0050084-A

Fastening the front seat lap and shoulder belt

*[SR03500(ALL)01/95] Adjust the lap part of the belt by pulling up on the shoulderbelt until the lap belt fits snugly and as low as possible aroundyour hips.

[SR03700(ALL)02/95] Push the release button on the buckle. This allows the tongue tounlatch from the buckle.

[SR03810(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050074-BUnfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts

*[SR03820(ALL)05/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original positionto prevent it from striking you or part of the vehicle.


Safety Restraints

11

[SR03830(ALL)05/95] Shoulder Belt Adjustment (Driver and Right FrontPassenger)

[SR03840(ALL)05/95] You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of five (5)positions. To adjust, pinch the release button and slide it up ordown until the belt rests on your shoulder near your neck.Release the button and make sure the adjuster is firmly seatedin one of the five (5) positions.

[SR03850(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050166-AThe shoulder belt height adjuster

[SR03860(ALL)11/93] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belt — Second RowBench Seat

[SR03901(ALL)11/93] There is a unique safety restraint system for the outside seatingposition of the second row bench seat. It is very important thatyou read and understand this section before anyone rides in theoutside seating position (near the sliding door) of thetwo-passenger bench seat.

[SR03910(ALL)05/95] In addition to safety belt anchorages in the floor and roofstructures, the second row bench seat has a detachable safetybelt anchor mounted to the right window side of the seat. Thesafety belt should always remain attached to this anchor exceptwhen removing this seat.

[SR03915(ALL)12/93] The second row passenger side outboard seating position uses ahook above the sliding door to stow the shoulder safety belt whenentering or exiting the vehicle or when it is not being used.


12

[SR03920(ALL)12/93] NOTE: When the belt is stowed using the hook, DO NOT usethe hanging belt as an assist when entering the vehicle.

[SR03925(ALL)05/95]

27-1/2 pica

art:0050212-DProper stowage of second row shoulder safety belt


Safety Restraints

13

[SR03935(ALL)11/93] When removing the second row bench seat:[SR03940(ALL)08/94] 1. Disengage the safety belt from the seat by inserting a key or

small screwdriver into the slot provided on the detachableanchor (see Figure 1). When this shoulder belt assembly is freeof the seat, allow the retractor to wind up the slack in the belt.

[SR03950(ALL)11/93] 2. Using the clip attached to the end of the shoulder belt, clipthe end of the belt to the stationary portion of the shoulderbelt (see Figure 2). The end of the shoulder belt must beclipped in order to keep it from striking anything duringvehicle operation.


14

[SR03955(ALL)05/95]

27-1/2 pica art:0050169-F

Figure 1: Second row bench seat detachable anchor


Safety Restraints

15

[SR03960(ALL)06/94]

24 pica art:0050170-D

Figure 2: Securing the detachable shoulder belt

[SR03970(ALL)02/94] Refer to the “Seats” section in the Features chapter of thisOwner Guide for information on removing and installing seats.

[SR03980(ALL)12/93] After re-installing the second row bench seat, make sure that thesafety belt is not twisted before you insert it into the detachableanchor. A twisted safety belt may cause the retractor to workimproperly. Then insert the detachable anchor tongue into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “snap” and feel the latchengage.


16


When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must beplaced in its original position. Improper installation ofthe seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts andcould increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warninglabel on the seat belt.

[SR04001(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor onthe shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safetybelt for front passenger and rear seat window passengers.

[SR04100(ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways:

[SR04200(ALL)05/95] Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking Mode[SR04300(ALL)05/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the

occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hardbraking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately five mph(8 km/h) or more.

[SR04400(ALL)05/95] Automatic Locking Mode[SR04500(ALL)05/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be

automatically locked and remain locked when the combinationlap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow theoccupant freedom of movement. This mode provides thefollowing:

[SR04600(ALL)05/95] ■ A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on occupant[SR04700(ALL)05/95] ■ Child seat or infant carrier restraint[SR04800(ALL)05/95] Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat.[SR04900(ALL)05/95] This mode must be used when installing a child seat on the

front passenger seat and rear window seats where dual lockingretractors are provided.

[SR05000(ALL)05/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to theautomatic locking mode, perform the following steps:

[SR05100(ALL)05/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.


Safety Restraints

17

[SR05200(ALL)05/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted, and when allowed to retract,a clicking sound will be heard. At this time, the belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode).

[SR05300(ALL)05/95] 3. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt is allowed toretract. This indicates that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode.

[SR05401(ALL)05/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckledand allowed to retract completely, the retractor willswitch back to the vehicle sensitive (emergency)locking mode. See detailed instructions under SafetySeats for Children later in this chapter.

*[SR05501(ALL)05/95] Lap Belts[SR05601(ALL)05/95] The lap belt in the center of the rear seat does not adjust

automatically. You must adjust it to fit snugly and as low aspossible around your hips. Do not wear it around your waist.

[SR05701(ALL)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belttongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue overyour lap until it reaches the buckle.

*[SR05801(ALL)06/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of thewebbing until the belt fits snugly.

[SR05900(ALL)05/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the buckle.[SR06000(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050085-A

Unfastening the lap belt in the center rear seating position


18

*[SR06100(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR06200(ALL)05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure thatthey work properly and are not damaged.

*[SR06300(ALL)05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, frontseat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if so equipped),child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if so equipped), andattaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Fordrecommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehiclesinvolved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision wasminor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do notshow damage and continue to operate properly, they do notneed to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during acollision should also be inspected and replaced if either damageor improper operation is noted.

%*[SR06400(ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR06500(ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that isrecommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleachor dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[SR06600(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR06700(ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when itis fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to thebelt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost fromyour dealer.


Failure to follow these instructions will affect theperformance of the safety belts and increase the risk ofpersonal injury.


Safety Restraints

19

*[SR08200(ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)

*[SR08450(ALL)05/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions inaddition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properly beltedoccupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. Thesupplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to thelower body.

*[SR08600(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to beproperly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury ina collision.

[SR08750(ALL)11/93]RWARNING

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, shouldalways wear their safety belts, whether or not an airbagSupplemental Restraint System is also provided at theirseating position. Failure to do so may increase the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event of a collision.

*[SR08800(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts evenwith an air bag system. Use your safety belts to:

*[SR08900(ALL)01/95] ■ help keep you in the proper position (away from the air bag)when it inflates

*[SR09000(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impactcollisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate insuch situations


20

*[SR09100(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are notsevere enough to activate the supplemental air bag

*[SR09200(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle

%*[SR09300(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR09400(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to helpprovide additional protection for you. In order to do this, theair bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are notseated in a normal riding position with your back against theseatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and couldpossibly hurt you as it inflates.


If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, aninflating air bag could cause serious injury.

*[SR09890(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.Front passengers, especially children and small adults, mustnever sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glovecompartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the airbag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sitwith their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the mostrearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child orinfant seats.


When using forward-facing child seats move thepassenger seat as far back from the instrument panel aspossible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.


Safety Restraints

21

*[SR09920(ALL)05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIRBAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEATAGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK, ARMRESTS ORCONSOLE. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYSBE SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT.


Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near theair bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areasthat may come in contact with a deploying air bag.Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a collision.

*[SR10200(ALL)06/95] For further information about the proper mounting ofequipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’sbrochure entitled Some Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by callingHelm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

*[SR10300(ALL)06/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use ofseat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the othersections of this part of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children.

*[SR10400(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint SystemOperates

*[SR10500(ALL)06/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of thedriver and passenger air bags, impact sensors, a systemdiagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electricalwiring which connects the components.

*[SR10600(ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel and isindicated by the letters “SRS.” The right front passenger seat airbag is in the upper right-hand section of the instrument panelledge above the glove compartment. The letters “SRS” appearthere. Both air bags are designed to stay out of sight until theyare activated.


22


Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air BagSupplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SR11600(ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impactand activates the air bags if necessary. The air bag system isdesigned to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions moresevere than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight)head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontalcollisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate theair bag.

*[SR11650(ALL)05/95] When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflaterapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of asecond. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate byreleasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The wholeprocess takes place in a matter of seconds.


Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Donot touch them after inflation.


Safety Restraints

23

*[SR12700(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050087-AInflated driver-side air bag


24

*[SR12800(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050088-AInflated passenger-side air bag


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOTFUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACEDIMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, theunrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR12910(ALL)05/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in acrash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, whichcontrols a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system,the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air baginflators.


Safety Restraints

25

*[SR12920(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and a tone to indicatethe condition of the system. The readiness light is in theinstrument cluster. When you turn the ignition to the ONposition, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6)seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system isoperating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system isnot required.

%*[SR12930(ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of thefollowing:

*[SR12940(ALL)05/95] ■ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR12950(ALL)05/95] ■ or it will not light immediately after ignition is turned on,

% [SR12960(ALL)05/95] ■ a group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern willrepeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.

[SR12970(ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the airbag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealerimmediately.

%*[SR13000(ALL)03/95] Disposal of supplemental air bag equipped vehicles

[SR13150(ALL)02/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see yourlocal Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST bedisposed of by qualified personnel.

*[SR13700(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR13800(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safetyrestraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle —this generally includes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you mustput them in safety seats that are made specially for children.Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for thesechildren. Check your local and state laws for specificrequirements.


26


Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.


Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargoarea. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seatbelt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent itfrom shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harmto passengers.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.


Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn asmall child. Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Safety Restraints

27

*[SR14400(ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accidentstatistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

*[SR14500(ALL)05/95] Built-In Child Seat (If equipped)[SR14600(ALL)04/95] The second row bench seat may include two optional built-in

child safety seats (one on the driver side and one on thepassenger side). This child restraint is to be used only bychildren who are at least one year old, weigh between 9 and27 kilograms (20 and 60 pounds) and whose shoulders (top) arebelow the bottom of the headrest in the full up position.

*[SR14625(ALL)05/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighs less than9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use a rear facing infant orconvertible seat because a child of that size is not sufficientlydeveloped to withstand crash forces in a front facing position.Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructions for weight andheight restrictions.


Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether theseat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat maycause injury during a sudden stop.

*[SR15200(ALL)05/95] Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle.It is the law in every state and province. This child seatconforms to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.

*[SR15301(ALL)05/95] Built-in child seat belt retractors

*[SR15320(ALL)06/95] The belts on the built-in child seat are equipped with a retractorthat locks when both belt tongues are latched into the crotchsafety belt and buckle.

*[SR15340(ALL)04/95] The retractor will switch from the emergency locking mode tothe automatic locking mode when the shoulder belts are pulledall the way out. The retractor will switch back to emergencylocking mode when the belts are unbuckled and the shoulderbelts retract completely.


28

*[SR15360(ALL)04/95] The automatic locking mode must be used to hold smallchildren in position, particularly sleeping children and thosewho may try to squirm out of the belts. The emergency lockingmode is also used while buckling the belts.

*[SR15380(ALL)03/95] Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness beltsfor correct placement and tightness. Use the child seat only ifthe harness belts will stay snug when belts are placed into thelock mode with a child in the seat. If belts do not remain snug,take the vehicle to the dealer for child seat repair.

*[SR15400(ALL)05/95] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided withthis child seat snugly around your child.


Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn asmall child. Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.

*[SR15700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of thischild restraint system can result in your child striking thevehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.


Safety Restraints

29

*[SR15800(ALL)05/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat

*[SR15900(ALL)05/95] Read the following procedures and all of the labels on theBuilt-In Child Seat before using the seat.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushionwith the adult safety belts. A child using the adult beltscould slide forward and out from under the safety belts.

[SR16100(ALL)04/00] 1. Push the headrest release lever and grasp the headrest asshown in Figure 1. Then release the lever and rotate theheadrest full up until the latch “clicks” in the full upposition. Refer to Figure 2.

[SR16200(ALL)04/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050134-BFigure 1: Releasing the headrest


30

[SR16300(ALL)04/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050135-BFigure 2: Release the lever and rotate the headrest to the full up position

[SR16401(ALL)04/95] 2. Lower the seat cushion. Refer to Figure 3. The child safetyseat will move to a semi-reclined position as the seat cushionis lowered.

[SR16501(ALL)04/95] 3. Read the information and warnings on the child seat cushionprotector flap and shoulder safety belt. Refer to Figure 3.Check the child’s size, weight and age to be sure the child isnot too small or too large for the child seat. Then fold theflap down onto the adult seat cushion.


Safety Restraints

31

[SR16700(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050136-DFigure 3: Child seat information and warnings

*[SR17200(ALL)03/95] 4. If connected, squeeze the top and the bottom of the righthalf of the chest clip and pull to separate both halves.


32

[SR17300(ALL)04/95] 5. Place the child on the child seat and position the shoulderbelts over each shoulder. Refer to Figure 4.

[SR17400(ALL)04/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050139-BFigure 4: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child

[SR17550(ALL)03/95] NOTE: Read the following steps carefully to become familiarwith the indicator windows located on each safety belttongue and the chest clip. When either of the tonguesor the chest clip is unbuckled, the color red appears inthe window. When the tongues or chest clip aresecurely buckled, the color green appears.


Safety Restraints

33

[SR17600(ALL)05/95] 6. Insert either the left or right safety belt tongue into thesingle opening of the crotch safety belt buckle as shown inFigure 5. (It does not matter which tongue is inserted first.)Then insert the other tongue. The color green must appear inthe indicator window on each tongue when buckled.

[SR17700(ALL)04/95]

27-1/2 pica

art:0050140-BFigure 5: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle


34

[SR17800(ALL)04/94] 7. Fasten both halves of the chest clip below the child’sshoulders and adjust it to comfortably hold the shoulderbelts in place on the child’s chest. The color green mustappear in the indicator window when fastened. (The purposeof this clip is to position the shoulder belts correctly on thechild’s shoulders.) Refer to Figure 6.


If both tongues do not latch in the buckle, do not use thechild seat. See your dealer for repairs.


Safety Restraints

35

[SR18025(ALL)04/95]

27-1/2 pica

art:0050141-BFigure 6: Securing the chest clip


36

[SR18050(ALL)04/95] 8. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that the crotch safetybelt buckle and chest clip are securely fastened. Refer toFigure 7.

[SR18075(ALL)04/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050142-BFigure 7: Checking for securely latched buckle and chest clip

[SR18150(ALL)06/95] 9. Pull left shoulder belt fully out to put the retractor into thelock mode. Allow belts to retract and fit snugly. The purposeof the lock mode is to prevent the child from getting out ofthe seat while the vehicle is in operation and to hold asleeping child in position. The belts will lock automaticallyduring a collision or hard braking.

*[SR18500(ALL)05/95] To remove the child from the built-in child seat:[SR18600(ALL)04/95] 1. Open the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 6.

*[SR18700(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safety belt buckle.[SR18800(ALL)04/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’s shoulders and remove

the child. Refer back to Figure 4.


Safety Restraints

37

[SR18900(ALL)06/95] To fold up the child seat:

[SR19000(ALL)04/95] 1. Fold the protector flap over the child seat cushion. Referback to Figure 3.

[SR19100(ALL)11/93] 2. Rotate the child seat cushion upward.

[SR19200(ALL)04/95] 3. Push the headrest release lever and slide the headrestdownward until it latches against the child seat cushion.Refer back to Figures 1 and 2.

[SR19300(ALL)05/95] 4. When the child seat is not in use, it may be folded up sothat an adult may use the vehicle’s rear seat.

*[SR19500(ALL)05/95] Inspection after a collision


All built-in child restraints, including seats, buckles,retractors, seat latches, interlocks, and attaching hardwareshould be inspected by a qualified dealer technician afterany collision.

*[SR19620(ALL)05/95] If the child seat was in use during a collision, Ford recommendsreplacing it. However, if the collision was minor and a qualifiedtehcnician finds that the child restraints do not show damageand continue to operate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. If there is any bending of the vehicle seat back or seatstructure, it should also be replaced. Built-in child seats not inuse during a collision should also be inspected and replaced ifeither damage or improper operation is noted.

*[SR19700(ALL)05/95] Cleaning

*[SR19800(ALL)05/95] Your Built-In Child Seat may be cleaned with mild soap andwater. Do not use household cleaners as they may weaken thewebbing or damage the plastic parts. For your convenience, theliner is made to be machine washable and air dried.


38

*[SR19900(ALL)05/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

[SR20000(ALL)05/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts system of yourchild seat. See your Ford Dealer if the shoulder belt webbing isfrayed, or if the buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.

%*[SR20100(ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR20200(ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats should alwayswear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, orcontact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of childthat will safely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted asdescribed, the risk of serious injury to the child in acollision will be much greater.

*[SR20400(ALL)05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder beltscan be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of thechild’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle mayhelp provide a good shoulder belt fit.

*[SR20600(ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder beltsshould always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching thechild’s thighs.




Safety Restraints

39

%*[SR20800(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR20900(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weightof the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’sinstructions when installing and using the safety seat.

*[SR30000(ALL)02/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a toptether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating positionwhich is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats WithTether Straps in this chapter.

*[SR30100(ALL)05/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correctsafety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure thetongue is securely fastened in the buckle.

*[SR30200(ALL)05/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to thepassenger air bag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bagcould push the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicleseatback. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BESECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child seats andinfant seats should be secured in the rear seat wheneverpossible. Forward-facing child seats used in the front seat musthave the passenger seat moved as far back from the instrumentpanel as possible.

*[SR30280(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.Front passengers, especially children and small adults, mustnever sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glovecompartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the airbag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sitwith their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the mostrearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child orinfant seats.


40


When using forward-facing child seats move thepassenger seat as far back from the instrument panel aspossible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.

*[SR30320(ALL)05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIRBAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEATAGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK, ARMRESTS ORCONSOLE. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYSBE SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT.

*[SR30380(ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the childoccupying the seat may be injured during a collision orsudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.


Safety Restraints

41


Always keep the buckle release button pointing upwardand away from the child seat, with the tongue betweenthe child seat and the release button as shown in thefollowing illustration.

[SR30901(ALL)05/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the FrontSeat and Rear Window Passenger SeatingPositions

[SR30950(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor onthe shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safetybelt for the front seat passenger and for the rear windowpassengers.

[SR31001(ALL)05/95] If you choose to install a forward-facing child seat or infantcarrier in the front seating positions, move the seat as far backas possible.


42

[SR31050(ALL)05/95] For seating positions equipped with a dual-locking moderetractor, use the following procedure:

[SR31101(ALL)05/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of passenger seat.

[SR31150(ALL)05/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp shoulder belt and lapbelt together. Figure 1.

[SR31201(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050276-A


Safety Restraints

43

[SR31250(ALL)05/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together,route the tongue through the child seat according to thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be surethat the belt webbing is not twisted.

[SR31301(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050277-ARouting the lap/shoulder belt


44

[SR31350(ALL)05/95] 4. Insert the belt into the proper buckle for that seating positionuntil you hear and feel the latch engage. See Figure 3. Makesure the tongue is latched securely to buckle by pulling onthe tongue.

[SR31401(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050278-ABuckling the belt

[SR31450(ALL)05/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At thistime, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode). See Figure 4.

[SR31501(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must be in theautomatic locking mode to properly restrain a childseat.


Safety Restraints

45

[SR31550(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050279-ASetting the retractor to automatic locking mode

[SR31601(ALL)05/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard asthe belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Pull on the lap belt portion acrossthe child seat towards the buckle and continue to pull up onthe shoulder belt portion while pushing down on the childseat allowing the shoulder belt to retract, to remove anyslack in seat belt. See Figures 5 and 6.


46

[SR31650(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050280-A


Safety Restraints

47

[SR31701(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050281-A


48

[SR31750(ALL)05/95] 7. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt theseat from side to side and in forward directions to makesure that the seat is securely held in place. See Figure 7.

[SR31801(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050282-AChecking that the seat is secure

[SR31850(ALL)05/95] 8. Double check the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode. See Figure 8.


Safety Restraints

49

[SR31901(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050283-AChecking the retractor

[SR31950(ALL)06/95] 9. Check to make sure that the seat is properly secured prior toeach use. If the retractor is not locked, repeat steps 6through 8.

[SR32001(ALL)05/95] NOTE: To remove retractor from the automatic lock mode,allow seat belt to retract fully to its stowed positionand the retractor will automatically switch back to thevehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage.

[SR32050(ALL)05/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the Rear CenterSeating Position with Locking Adjustable Lap Belt

[SR32101(ALL)05/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongueso that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction ofwebbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing.

[SR32150(ALL)05/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.


50

[SR32201(ALL)05/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seataccording to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

[SR32250(ALL)05/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the centerseating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Makesure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pullingon tongue.

[SR32301(ALL)05/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose endof the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt.

[SR32350(ALL)05/95] 6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt thechild seat from side to side and in forward directions toensure that the seat is held securely in place. If the child seatmoves excessively, repeat steps 5 through 6 or properlyinstall the child seat in a different seating position.

*[SR32800(ALL)05/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SR33000(ALL)05/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tetherstrap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches toan anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safetyseat for information about ordering a tether strap.

[SR33101(ALL)11/93] You can attach a tether strap to the front passenger or secondrow seats by using the built-in tether anchors provided on theback of the seats as described below.

[SR33201(ALL)11/93] Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to attach thetether strap to the tether anchor.


Use only the tether attachment locations shown below.The tether anchor may not perform properly if the wrongmounting location is used.


Safety Restraints

51

[SR33401(ALL)06/95] Three tether strap anchor locations have been provided in yourvehicle. They are as follows:

[SR33501(ALL)06/95]

24 pica art:0050183-A

Tether strap anchor locations

[SR33601(ALL)06/95] ■ FRONT PASSENGER SEATING POSITION — You must usethe tether strap anchor location provided on the back of theseat cushion frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)


52

[SR33701(ALL)06/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050180-AFigure 1: Tether anchor location — Front passenger seat

[SR33801(ALL)06/95] ■ SECOND ROW BENCH (if equipped) SEATING POSITION— You must use one of the two tether strap anchor locations(one each side) provided on the back of the seat cushion.(Refer to Figures 2 and 3.)

[SR33901(ALL)06/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050181-A Figure 2: Tether anchor location — second row bench seat (with built-in childsafety seat)


Safety Restraints

53

[SR34001(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050184-AFigure 3: Tether anchor location — second row bench seat (without built-inchild safety seat)

[SR34101(ALL)06/85] ■ SECOND ROW BUCKET (if equipped) SEATING POSITION— You must use the tether strap anchor location providedon the back of the seat cushion. (Refer to Figure 4.)


54

[SR34201(ALL)06/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050178-A Figure 4: Tether anchor location — second row bucket seat


Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown inthe illustrations. The tether anchor may not performproperly if the wrong mounting location is used.

[SR34380(ALL)05/95] Once you have attached the safety seat, test the seat before youplace the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try totug the seat forward. Check to see if the belt holds the seat inplace.


If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of achild being injured in a collision or sudden stop greatlyincreases.


55

Starting Your Windstar

*[ST02000(ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST02100(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

*[ST02300(ALL)09/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0040047-C The ignition positions

% [ST02401(ALL)02/94] ACCESSORY allows you to operate some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories while the engine is not running. Forexample, you can use ACCESSORY to turn on the radio orwindshield wipers without starting the engine.

*[ST02501(ALL)01/93] LOCK locks the steering wheel and the gearshift lever.

*[ST02600(ALL)01/93] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessorieswithout locking the steering wheel, or the gearshift lever.

*[ST02701(ALL)01/93] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights to makesure they work before you start the engine. The key returns tothe ON position once the engine is started and remains in thisposition while the engine runs.

*[ST02801(ALL)01/93] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine startsso that you don’t damage the starter. The key should return tothe ON position when you release it. The START position alsoallows you to test the brake warning light.

File:wnsts.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:25:19 1996

56

%*[ST03100(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST03200(ALL)01/93] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the keyfrom the ignition. The LOCK feature helps to protect yourvehicle from theft, because it also locks the steering wheel andthe gearshift lever when the key is removed.

%*[ST03300(ALL)01/93] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position, and you are unableto turn it, move your steering wheel left or right until the keyturns freely.

*[ST03400(ALL)01/93] To remove your key from the ignition:

*[ST03500(ALL)05/95] 1. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park).

*[ST03600(ALL)02/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

*[ST03700(ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST03800(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

*[ST03900(ALL)01/93]RWARNING

When you leave your vehicle, place the gearshift lever inPark (P). Set the parking brake fully, and shut off theengine. Never park your vehicle in Neutral (N). If you donot take these precautions, your vehicle may movesuddenly and injure someone.


Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone inyour vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselvesor others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries to people as well asanimals.



57

%*[ST04200(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines[ST04300(ALL)02/95] Since your vehicle has a fuel-injected engine, the most

important thing to remember is to avoid pressing down on theaccelerator while cranking the engine to start. Only use theaccelerator when you have problems getting your vehiclestarted. See Starting a Cold Engine and Starting a Warm Enginelater in this chapter for details about when to use theaccelerator while you start your vehicle.

%*[ST04400(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle

[ST04500(ALL)02/95]RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in otherenclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always openthe garage door before you start the engine. SeeGuarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for moreinstructions.

*[ST04600(ALL)01/93] Before you start your vehicle, always:

*[ST04700(ALL)01/93] 1. Make sure you and all your passengers buckle your safetybelts. See Safety belts in the Index for more details.

*[ST04800(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turnedoff when starting.

[ST04900(ALL)02/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift lever is in Park (P) and theparking brake is set before you turn the key.

[ST05100(ALL)02/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lightson the instrument cluster to make sure that they work. Refer tothe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.


58

[ST05400(ALL)02/95] Starting the Engine

[ST05500(ALL)02/95] To start the engine:

[ST05600(ALL)02/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle andunder Testing the Warning Lights in this section.

*[ST05700(ALL)01/93] 2. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition keyto ON.

[ST05800(ALL)02/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting yourengine. DO NOT use the accelerator until after the engine isrunning and you are ready to drive away.

[ST05900(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position until the engine starts.(Release the key after the engine has started and it willreturn to the ON position.)

[ST06000(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steeringwheel slightly to relieve any binding.

%*[ST06600(ALL)04/94] For a cold engine:

*[ST06700(ALL)04/95] ■ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine doesnot start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the keyto OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

*[ST06800(ALL)04/95] ■ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the engine does notstart in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood theengine, then try again.

*[ST06900(ALL)04/94] For a warm engine:

*[ST07000(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not hold the key in the START position for more thanfive (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start withinfive (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFFposition. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then tryagain.



59

*[ST07030(ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as theengine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter orflood the engine.

*[ST07060(ALL)02/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keepyour foot on the brake pedal and release the parking brake.Put the gearshift lever in gear, slowly release the brake pedaland drive away in the normal manner.

*[ST07090(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock that prevents you fromshifting out of P (Park) unless your foot is on thebrake pedal.

*[ST07200(ALL)03/95] If the engine still does not start after two attempts:

*[ST07300(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the key to the OFF position and wait about twominutes.

*[ST07400(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it.

[ST07500(ALL)02/95] 3. Turn the key to the START position.

[ST07600(ALL)02/95] 4. Release the key when the engine starts.

[ST07700(ALL)02/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up.Then drive away in the normal manner.

*[ST07800(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switchmay have been triggered. For directions on how to reset theswitch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

[ST07900(ALL)02/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle rpm. When youstart your vehicle, the engine’s idling rpm normally runs high.These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightlyfaster than when the engine is at its normal warm engine idlespeed. It should, however, slow down when the vehicle warmsup. If it does not, have the idle rpm checked.


60


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.

%*[ST08300(ALL)03/95] Using the Engine Block Heater (If equipped)(Standard in Canada)

[ST08400(ALL)03/94] Using your engine block heater is strongly recommended if youlive in a region where temperatures consistently reach s20˚F(s29˚C) or below during the winter months. An engine blockheater warms the engine coolant which improves starting,warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrostsystem to respond more quickly.


To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)adapters.

*[ST08700(ALL)01/93] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours beforeyou start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than threehours will not damage the engine, so you can leave it pluggedin all night to start your vehicle the following morning.



61

%*[ST09900(ALL)02/95] What To Do If The Engine Does Not Start%*[ST10000(ALL)02/95] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch

*[ST10100(ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after acollision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have beentriggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop thefuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantialjolt.

*[ST10200(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switchby hand before you can start your vehicle.

[ST10300(ALL)06/94] The fuel pump shut-off switch reset button is located behind thejack access cover under the jack in the cargo compartment.

[ST10400(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050046-AFuel pump shut-off switch reset button location


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try tostart your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of thevehicle and call the local fire department or a towingservice.


62

*[ST10600(ALL)02/95] If your engine cranks, but does not start after a collision:

*[ST10700(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF position.

*[ST10800(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST10900(ALL)02/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the fuel pump shut-offreset button down. If the red button is already set, you mayhave a different mechanical or electrical problem.

*[ST11000(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds,then turn it to the OFF position.

*[ST11100(ALL)02/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see orsmell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If there is no fuel,you can try to start your vehicle again.

*[ST11200(ALL)02/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving your vehicle.

%*[ST11300(ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

[ST11400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present inexhaust fumes.


Never let your vehicle idle in an enclosed area, and donot sit in a parked vehicle, (with the engine running) formore than a short period of time. Exhaust fumes,particularly carbon monoxide, might build up. Thesefumes are harmful and could kill you.


If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicleimmediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.These fumes are harmful and could kill you.



63

*[ST11700(ALL)02/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked by aqualified technician whenever:

*[ST11800(ALL)02/95] ■ your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST11900(ALL)02/95] ■ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST12000(ALL)02/95] ■ your vehicle has been damaged in an accident

[ST12100(ALL)02/95] If the exhaust system has any indications of leaks it should berepaired immediately.

*[ST12200(ALL)02/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air intake vents clear ofsnow, leaves, and other objects.

[ST12300(ALL)02/95] If the engine idles while you are stopped in an open area forlong periods of time, open the windows at least one inch. Also,adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in outside air.

*[ST12400(ALL)02/95] Read the section Climate Control Systems for instructions onbringing fresh outside air into your vehicle. Refer to the Index.


65

Warning Lights and Gauges

%*[LG00250(ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is dividedinto several different sections. The illustrations on the followingpages show the major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on allvehicles.

*[LG00270(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has one of the following clusters:

[LG00290(ALL)06/94] ■ Mechanical Cluster

[LG00300(ALL)05/89] ■ Mechanical Cluster with a tachometer

[LG00320(ALL)10/93] ■ Electronic Cluster

*[LG00330(ALL)05/94] If you are not sure which cluster your vehicle has, check thediagrams on the following pages.

File:wnlgs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:25:03 1996

66

[LG00401(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

50

23

0-C

Mechanical

Cluster

File:wnlgs.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:25:03 1996

Warning

Lightsand

Gauges67

[LG00450(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0050127-F

The

mechanical

clusterw

ithtachom

eter

File:wnlgs.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:25:03 1996

68

%*[LG00475(ALL)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster[LG00501(ALL)06/94] The following warning lights and gauges are on the Mechanical

Cluster. All of these indicators alert you to the status of vehiclesystems or possible problems with your vehicle. Some of thelights listed are optional. The following section explains each ofthe indicators.

[LG00600(ALL)12/93] Warning and Indicator Lights%*[LG00900(ALL)03/95] Brake System Light

[LG01000(ALL)11/93] The warning light for the brakes indicates two things — thateither the parking brake is on or not fully released, or that thebrake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If thefluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by aqualified service technician.

[LG01100(ALL)11/93]

6 pica art:0050144-B

The brake system light

[LG01200(ALL)12/93] The BRAKE light normally comes on when you turn theignition key to the ON or START position to verify that theindicator bulb is working. If the light stays on or comes onwhen the engine is running and after you have released theparking brake fully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG01300(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not beworking properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.



69

% [LG01400(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

*[LG01500(ALL)12/93] To check the anti-lock brake warning light, turn the ignition keyto the ON position. The ABS warning light should glowmomentarily.

*[LG01600(ALL)10/93] NOTE: If it does not glow at all or stays on for a long time,have your vehicle’s electrical system checkedimmediately.

[LG01700(ALL)11/93]


The anti-lock brake warning light


If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on orcomes on while driving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soon as possible.

[LG01820(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brakewarning light is not lit, the anti-lock system isdisabled but normal brake function remainsoperational.

% [LG01900(ALL)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG02000(ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safetybelt. The following conditions will take place:

[LG02010(ALL)02/95] ■ If the driver does not fasten the safety belt before theignition is turned to ON, the chime will sound for four (4) toeight (8) seconds and the light will illuminate for one (1) totwo (2) minutes, or until the safety belt is fastened.


70

[LG02021(ALL)02/95] ■ If the driver fastens the safety belt before the ignition isturned to ON, the chime will not sound and the light willnot illuminate.

[LG02050(ALL)02/95] ■ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is on and thechime is sounding, both the light and the chime turn off.

[LG02100(ALL)11/93]


The safety belt warning light

%*[LG02200(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG02301(ALL)05/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consistsof the hardware and software necessary to monitor theoperation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control systemduring normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, theCheck Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

[LG02400(ALL)11/93]


The check engine warning light

*[LG02410(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrectoperation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglaralarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tapping into or runningwires close to powertrain control system wires or components.



71

*[LG02420(ALL)05/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key toON, but it should turn off when the engine starts. If the lightdoes not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if itcomes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problemwith one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG02430(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals whileyou are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine ismisfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at thefirst opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towedin.

*[LG02440(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you aredriving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the conditioncorrected itself.

*[LG02460(ALL)05/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when anengine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, theCheck Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine wasmisfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. Afterrefueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off afterthe vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycleswithout a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consistsof engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambienttemperature) and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG02470(ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightwill turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is notnecessary to have the engine serviced.


72

*[LG02500(ALL)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light maycome on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the CheckEngine Warning Light comes on and you suspect that the fuelcap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it issafely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace thecap, making sure it is properly seated.

*[LG02600(ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up cycles and onthe fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightshould turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourthengine re-start, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or aqualified technician.

%*[LG02700(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

[LG02801(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that your battery is not being charged. Thelight comes on briefly during the display self-test every timeyou turn your ignition key to the ON position. The light will gooff when the key is turned to the START position. The lightshould stay off when the self-test is done if the engine isrunning and the alternator is charging.

*[LG03100(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.

[LG03150(ALL)02/94]


The charging system light



73

% [LG03200(ALL)02/95] Oil Pressure Light

[LG03275(ALL)08/94]


The oil pressure light

[LG03300(ALL)01/95] This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level.However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oilpressure. The light should come on every time your ignition keyis turned to ON or START, and should go out when the enginestarts. If the light stays on or turns on while the engine isrunning, you have lost oil pressure and continued operation willcause severe engine damage.

*[LG03500(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG03600(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG03700(ALL)11/94] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you do not stop theengine as soon as safely possible, severe engine damagecould result.

[LG03900(ALL)06/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level. (See “Checking and AddingEngine Oil” in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter of thisOwner Guide.) If you do not follow these instructions, youor others could be injured. To ensure an accurate reading,your vehicle should be on level ground.

[LG03950(ALL)10/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary beforeyou start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operatethe engine if the light is on regardless of the oil level.Contact your nearest dealer for further service.


74

%*[LG04000(ALL)01/93] Door Ajar Warning Light

*[LG04100(ALL)08/94] If the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door or theliftgate is not completely closed, the light will illuminate.

[LG04150(ALL)06/94] If the light illuminates, safely stop the vehicle and check andclose all doors until the light turns off.

[LG04200(ALL)11/93]


The door ajar warning light

%*[LG05801(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG05902(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that the Air Bag system is not functionaland needs to be serviced. The light illuminates forapproximately six seconds when the ignition is turned to theON position to verify that the indicator bulb is working. If thelight fails to illuminate, flashes continuously, or remains on,have the air bag system serviced as soon as possible.

[LG06001(ALL)11/93]


The air bag readiness light



75

%*[LG06100(ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

[LG06150(ALL)12/93] See “Turn Signals” in the Steering Column Controls chapter ofthis Owner Guide.

[LG06200(ALL)12/93]

6 pica art:0050190-A

The turn signal indicator lights

[LG06250(ALL)03/94] If one or both of your turn signal indicators does not light upor remains on continuously when you signal a turn, have theturn signaling system serviced as soon as possible.

%*[LG06400(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

[LG06500(ALL)10/93] This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to highbeam or when the high beams are flashed. If your vehicle isequipped with Daytime Running Lights (Canadian vehiclesonly) and the headlamps are on when the high beams areflashed, the high beam indicator will not light.

[LG06600(ALL)11/93]


The high beam indicator light


76

% [LG06620(ALL)10/93] Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning(Optional Chime with Light)

[LG06640(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that the level of your washer fluid is low,and you have to add more fluid. This light comes on brieflyafter you turn your ignition key from the START to the ONposition. If the washer fluid is low, a one second chime willsound and the light will remain on for 60 seconds. If the washerfluid is not low, the light should turn off a few seconds afterthe engine has started. The light and chime also come on if thewasher fluid is low when you use your windshield washers.

[LG06660(ALL)03/94] The washer fluid is only checked when the engine is started orthe windshield washers are in operation. The light will notcome on if the fluid level becomes low while you are drivingunless you turn on the windshield washers.

[LG06680(ALL)12/93]


The low windshield washer indicator light

% [LG06685(ALL)03/94] Low Fuel Indicator Light

[LG06690(ALL)04/95] This light comes on when your fuel gauge indicatesapproximately 1/16 of a tank. The ignition must be turned toON in order for this light to come on.

[LG06695(ALL)11/93]


The low fuel indicator light



77

*[LG06860(ALL)10/93] Gauges%*[LG06900(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG07040(ALL)03/94] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in thefuel tank only when the ignition is ON. For proper fuel gaugeindication after adding fuel, the ignition should be in the OFFposition while the vehicle is being refueled.

[LG07080(ALL)03/94] The fuel gauge indicator may also vary slightly when thevehicle is in motion. With the ignition OFF, the fuel gaugeindicator may drift from the ignition ON position as well.

[LG07090(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050235-AFuel gauge — base cluster


78

[LG07100(ALL)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050126-CThe engine coolant temperature and fuel gauge

%*[LG07200(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG07301(ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, notthe coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level ormixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate.

[LG07351(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050236-AEngine coolant temperature gauge — base cluster



79

[LG07401(ALL)11/93] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the NORMALband as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for thepointer to fluctuate within the normal band under normaldriving conditions. Under certain driving conditions such asheavy stop and go traffic, or driving up hills in hot weather, thepointer may indicate at the top of the NORMAL band. This isalso acceptable.

*[LG07501(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above theNORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating andcontinued operation may cause engine damage.

*[LG07601(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG07701(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible.

*[LG07801(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon assafely possible, severe engine damage could result.

*[LG07901(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANTSYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL.

[LG08001(ALL)11/93] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions onchecking and adding coolant to your engine in this OwnerGuide. See engine coolant in the index. If you do not followthese instructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG08025(ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant systemserviced.

%*[LG08400(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG08500(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) perhour your vehicle is moving.

%*[LG08600(ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG08700(ALL)01/93] The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has beendriven.


80

%*[LG08800(ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

%*[LG08900(ALL)01/93] The trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.Before each trip, set the trip odometer to zero by pushing thereset button.

[LG09000(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050155-CThe speedometer, odometer and trip odometer

% [LG09101(ALL)05/94] Tachometer (If equipped)

*[LG09120(ALL)05/95] The tachometer will show you the engine’s speed measured inrevolutions per minute (RPM).

*[LG09130(ALL)05/95] The tachometer may move slightly when the key is placed inthe ACC or ON position, with the engine off. This is normaland does not affect the performance of the tachometer when theengine is running.

[LG09140(ALL)03/94] Some vehicles are equipped with an engine speed (RPM)limiting device that is contained within the Electronic EngineControl Module. The purpose of this device is to maintain peakengine speed (RPM) below a specified limit. (Engine speedlimits may vary based on engine size.)



81

*[LG09150(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at highspeeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is anormal condition and can be avoided by reducingvehicle/engine speed.

[LG09250(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050168-BThe tachometer


82

[LG09570(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0050076-E

The

electroniccluster

File:wnlgs.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:25:03 1996


83

%*[LG9580(ALL)09/93] Electronic Cluster (If Equipped)[LG09600(ALL)03/94] The Electronic Cluster works only when your ignition is in the

ON position. Each time you start your vehicle, the displays gothrough a self-test by lighting up all segments for about onesecond and then turning off all segments for about one second,before displaying actual gauge readings. (The turn signal andhigh beam indicators do not light during the self-test. The LOWOIL light may remain on throughout the self-test and for severalseconds after normal readings are displayed.) This self-testdemonstrates that all of the display segments are workingproperly.

[LG09620(ALL)03/94] The electronic cluster has three major functions to provide youwith information about your vehicle’s operating status:

[LG09650(ALL)10/93] ■ Warning and Indicator Lights

[LG09661(ALL)10/93] ■ Electronic Gauges

[LG09670(ALL)12/93] ■ The Fuel Computer

[LG10801(ALL)12/93] Warning and Indicator Lights%*[LG10820(ALL)02/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG10823(ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safetybelt. The following conditions will take place:

[LG10826(ALL)02/95] ■ If the driver does not fasten the safety belt before theignition is turned to ON, the chime will sound for four (4) toeight (8) seconds and the light will illuminate for one (1) totwo (2) minutes, or until the safety belt is fastened.

[LG10829(ALL)02/95] ■ If the driver fastens the safety belt before the ignition isturned to ON, the chime will not sound and the light willnot illuminate.

[LG10832(ALL)02/95] ■ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is on and thechime is sounding, both the light and the chime turn off.


84

[LG10835(ALL)11/93]


The safety belt warning light

%*[LG10845(ALL)03/95] Brake System Light

[LG10848(ALL)11/93] The warning light for the brakes indicates two things — thateither the parking brake is on or not fully released, or that thebrake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If thefluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by aqualified service technician.

[LG10850(ALL)11/93]


The brake system light

[LG10855(ALL)12/93] The BRAKE light normally comes on when you turn theignition key to the ON or START position to verify that theindicator bulb is working. If the light stays on or comes onwhen the engine is running and after you have released theparking brake fully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced.


The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not beworking properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.



85

%*[LG10861(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG10871(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that the Air Bag system is not functionaland needs to be serviced. The light illuminates forapproximately six seconds when the ignition is turned to theON position to verify that the indicator bulb is working. If thelight fails to illuminate, flashes continuously, or remains on,have the air bag system serviced as soon as possible.

[LG10881(ALL)11/93]


The air bag readiness light

%*[LG10901(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

[LG10911(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that your battery is not being charged. Thelight comes on briefly during the display self-test every timeyou turn your ignition key to the ON position. The light will gooff when the key is turned to the START position. The lightshould stay off when the self-test is done if the engine isrunning and the alternator is charging.

*[LG10913(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.

[LG10915(ALL)11/93]


The charging system light


86

%*[LG10921(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

[LG10932(ALL)02/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consistsof the hardware and software necessary to monitor theoperation of the powetrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control systemduring normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, theCheck Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

[LG10941(ALL)11/93]


The check engine warning light

*[LG10949(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrectoperation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglaralarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tapping into or runningwires close to powertrain control system wires or components.

[LG10955(ALL)02/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key toON, but it should turn off when the engine starts. If the lightdoes not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if itcomes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problemwith one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG10960(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals whileyou are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine ismisfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at thefirst opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towedin.



87

*[LG10962(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you aredriving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the conditioncorrected itself.

*[LG10965(ALL)05/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when anengine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, theCheck Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine wasmisfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. Afterrefueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off afterthe vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycleswithout a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consistsof engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambienttemperature) and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG10968(ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightwill turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is notnecessary to have the engine serviced.

[LG10969(ALL)02/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light maycome on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the CheckEngine Warning Light comes on and you suspect that the fuelcap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it issafely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace thefuel cap, making sure it is properly seated.

[LG10970(ALL)02/95] After completing three (3) consecutive warm up cycles and onthe fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightshould turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourthengine re-start, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or aqualified technician.


88

% [LG10971(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

*[LG10975(ALL)12/93] To check the anti-lock brake warning light, turn the ignition keyto the ON position. The ABS warning light should glowmomentarily.

*[LG10981(ALL)10/93] NOTE: If it does not glow at all or stays on for a long time,have your vehicle’s electrical system checkedimmediately.

[LG10985(ALL)11/93]


The anti-lock brake warning light



[LG10995(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brakewarning light is not lit, the anti-lock system isdisabled but normal brake function remainsoperational.



89

% [LG11001(ALL)02/95] Oil Pressure Light

[LG11005(ALL)06/94]


The oil pressure light

[LG11010(ALL)11/93] This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level.However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oilpressure. The light will come on briefly during the displayself-test every time you turn your key to the ON position. Thelight will go off when the key is turned to the START position.The light should stay off when the self-test is done if the engineis running with normal oil pressure. If the light comes on whilethe engine is running, you have lost oil pressure and continuedoperation will cause severe engine damage.

*[LG11020(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG11030(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG11040(ALL)11/94] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you do not stop theengine as soon as safely possible, severe engine damagecould result.

[LG11050(ALL)06/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level. (See “Checking and AddingEngine Oil” in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter of thisOwner Guide.) If you do not follow these instructions, youor others could be injured. To ensure an accurate reading,your vehicle should be on level ground.

[LG11060(ALL)10/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary beforeyou start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operatethe engine if the light is on regardless of the oil level.Contact your nearest dealer for further service.


90

%*[LG11111(ALL)01/93] Door Ajar Warning Light

*[LG11121(ALL)08/94] If the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door or theliftgate is not completely closed, the light will illuminate.

[LG11126(ALL)06/94] If the light illuminates, safely stop the vehicle and check andclose all doors until the light turns off.

[LG11131(ALL)11/93]


The door ajar warning light

%*[LG11231(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

[LG11241(ALL)10/93] This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to highbeam or when the high beams are flashed. If your vehicle isequipped with Daytime Running Lights (Canadian vehiclesonly) and the headlamps are on when the high beams areflashed, the high beam indicator will not light.

[LG11251(ALL)11/93]


The high beam indicator light



91

% [LG11255(ALL)03/94] Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

[LG11257(ALL)11/93] This light indicates that the level of your washer fluid is low,and you have to add more fluid. This light comes on brieflyafter you turn your ignition key from the START to the ONposition. If the washer fluid is low, a one second chime willsound and the light will remain on for 60 seconds. If the washerfluid is not low, the light should turn off a few seconds afterthe engine has started. The light and chime also come on if thewasher fluid is low when you use your windshield washers.

[LG11258(ALL)03/94] The washer fluid is only checked when the engine is started orthe windshield washers are in operation. The light will notcome on if the fluid level becomes low while you are drivingunless you turn on the windshield washers.

[LG11260(ALL)12/93]


The low windshield washer indicator light

*[LG11265(ALL)06/95] Speed Control Indicator

[LG11270(ALL)05/95] A SPEED CONTROL light is displayed in the optional electronicinstrument cluster when the speed control system is engaged.The display will turn off when the brake pedal is pressed or ifspeed control is shut off.

*[LG11275(ALL)05/95] This display does not indicate any problems with the speedcontrol, but is simply a convenient way of knowing when it isactive.


92

[LG11285(ALL)12/93]


The speed control light

%*[LG11301(ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

[LG11310(ALL)12/93] See “Turn Signals” in the Steering Column Controls chapter ofthis Owner Guide.

[LG11320(ALL)12/93]


The turn signal indicator lights

[LG11331(ALL)03/94] If one or both of your turn signal indicators does not light upor remains on continuously when you signal a turn, have theturn signaling system serviced as soon as possible.



93

% [LG11351(ALL)10/93] Hazard Flasher Indicator Light

[LG11371(ALL)03/94] This light flashes when you turn on the hazard flashers. If yourignition is ON, the turn signal indicator lights in the electroniccluster will flash in time with the hazard flashers.

[LG11385(ALL)08/94]


[LG11400(ALL)10/93] Electronic Gauges%*[LG11500(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

[LG11550(ALL)06/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0050175-B

Engine coolant temperature gauge

[LG11600(ALL)02/94] This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine’s coolant, notthe coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level ormixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate. The gauge isidentified by a thermometer symbol, an “H” (hot), and a “C”(cold). The “NORM” indicates the normal operating range. Thebars will move into the normal operating range as the enginecoolant warms up. It is acceptable for the bars to fluctuatewithin the normal operating range under normal drivingconditions. Under certain driving conditions, such as heavy stopand go traffic, or driving up hills in hot weather, the gauge may


94

indicate at the top of the NORMAL band. This is alsoacceptable.

[LG11700(ALL)04/95] If, under any circumstances, the bars move above the NORMALband, the temperature symbol will flash and a chime will soundto alert the driver that the engine coolant is overheating andcontinued operation may cause engine damage.

*[LG11800(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG11900(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible.

*[LG12000(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon assafely possible, severe engine damage could result.

*[LG12100(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANTSYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL.

[LG12200(ALL)11/93] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions onchecking and adding coolant to your engine in this OwnerGuide. See engine coolant in the index. If you do not followthese instructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG12300(ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant systemserviced.

[LG12400(ALL)06/94] If the temperature gauge displays only the top two and bottomtwo bars, the temperature indication system is indicating that itrequires servicing. Take the vehicle to a dealership for service assoon as possible.

%*[LG12600(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG12700(ALL)03/94] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel you havein the fuel tank. The number of bars illuminated in the displayindicates fuel level. Your ignition must be in the ON position toread the fuel gauge. Read the fuel level at the top bar that is lit.When only one bar on the gauge is lit, the fuel pump symbolon the gauge will flash to warn you of a low fuel levelcondition.



95

[LG12800(ALL)10/93] If the fuel gauge displays only the top two bars and bottom twobars, or if the Distance to Empty function in the fuel computerdisplays CO or CS, you must have the fuel indication systemserviced.

[LG12900(ALL)10/93] Turn your ignition to OFF while fueling to obtain an accuratefuel gauge indication. If you do not turn your ignition off, thefuel gauge will not display the new fuel level immediately, butwill slowly increase to the correct value.

[LG13000(ALL)03/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0050156-B

The fuel gauge

%*[LG13100(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

[LG13200(ALL)08/94] The electronic speedometer in the left center of the cluster hastwo displays that indicate how fast your vehicle is moving inmiles or kilometers per hour. Press the fuel computer E/M(English/Metric) button to switch between MPH and km/h. Themain digital speedometer indicates speed up to 120 MPH(199 km/h). The secondary bar graph speedometer indicatesapproximate speed up to 120 MPH in steps of 4 MPH(180 km/h in steps of 6 km/h). The bar graph speedometershows your approximate speed relative to the full scale, and itgives you a visual indication of how fast your speed is changingwhen you accelerate or decelerate.

[LG13300(ALL)10/93] Your vehicle may not actually be able to travel at the maximumspeeds indicated by the speedometer due to a speed limiter inthe Electronic Engine Control module. The purpose of thelimiter is to maintain vehicle speed below a specified limit toensure safe vehicle operation.


96

[LG13400(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050192-AThe speedometer and odometer

%*[LG13500(ALL)01/95] Odometer

[LG13600(ALL)06/94] The odometer displays the total number of miles or kilometersyour vehicle has been driven. Press the fuel computer E/M(English/Metric) button to switch between miles and kilometers.

[LG13700(ALL)10/93] If the electronic cluster is replaced and the mileage on the oldodometer is unknown, the replacement cluster will be set tozero miles (kilometers), and the circle “S” symbol to the left ofthe odometer will be lit to indicate that a service cluster hasbeen installed. A label showing the estimated mileage will thenbe attached to the door pillar. If the actual mileage can beverified, an authorized service center can program the correctmileage into the replacement cluster, and the circled “S” willnot be lit.

[LG13800(ALL)10/93] If the odometer displays the word “Error,” have your vehicleserviced.



97

%*[LG13900(ALL)02/95] Tachometer

[LG14000(ALL)10/93] The electronic bar graph tachometer in the right center of thecluster displays the approximate engine speed in revolutions perminute (RPM). Each bar on the display represents 200 RPM.

[LG14100(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050193-AThe tachometer

% [LG16000(ALL)10/93] Fuel Computer[LG16100(ALL)11/93] The Electronic Cluster Fuel Computer display is located under

the tachometer and consists of a menu and a digital display.The fuel computer can display five different functions. They are:

[LG16150(ALL)10/93] ■ Trip distance

[LG16200(ALL)10/93] ■ Instantaneous fuel economy

[LG16250(ALL)10/93] ■ Average fuel economy

[LG16300(ALL)10/93] ■ Distance to empty

[LG16350(ALL)10/93] ■ Average speed


98

[LG16500(ALL)10/93] Fuel Computer Buttons

[LG16600(ALL)10/93] The fuel computer functions are controlled by the three buttonslocated to the right of the electronic cluster:

[LG16650(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0050049-A

The fuel computer buttons

% [LG16700(ALL)10/93] SELECT — The SELECT button lets you choose the functiondisplayed by the fuel computer. Each time you press theSELECT button, the fuel computer points to the next choice onthe menu. After it reaches the last choice, it returns to the topof the menu.

% [LG16800(ALL)10/93] E/M — The E/M button lets you switch the fuel computerfunctions and the speedometer and odometer displays betweenEnglish and metric units. The displays remain in the chosenunits until you switch them again, even after you turn off thevehicle and restart it.

% [LG16900(ALL)03/94] RESET — The RESET button lets you reset or initialize the fuelcomputer function that is displayed. Only TRIP DISTANCE,AVERAGE ECONOMY, and AVERAGE SPEED can be reset.

[LG16950(ALL)12/93] Any time one of the fuel computer buttons is pressed, a shortchime will sound.



99

[LG17000(ALL)11/93] The Fuel Computer Functions

[LG17100(ALL)06/94] The complete fuel computer menu is displayed for about fiveseconds after the cluster self-test (when the ignition is turned toON) and after the SELECT button is pressed. After five seconds,only the selected function is displayed.

% [LG17200(ALL)10/93] TRIP DISTANCE

[LG17300(ALL)03/94] Your trip distance is the distance you have traveled since thelast reset. To display your current trip distance, press theSELECT button until the pointer is at TRIP DISTANCE. To resetthe trip distance to zero, press the RESET button while thepointer is at TRIP DISTANCE. You may want to use this featureto see how far you have traveled on a particular trip.

[LG17400(ALL)08/94] If you do not reset your trip distance, the display will roll overto zero when it passes 1999 miles or kilometers. If you switchfrom miles to kilometers after you have passed 1242 miles(1999 kilometers), you must add 2000 to the kilometers displayfor actual distance traveled. The display will then roll over tozero when it passes 1218 kilometers (3218 kilometers or 1999miles traveled) whether you select English or metric units. If thedisplay is in metric units when you pass 1999 kilometers (1242miles), both English and metric trip distances will roll over tozero.

% [LG17500(ALL)10/93] INSTANT ECONOMY

[LG17550(ALL)03/94] Your instantaneous fuel economy is your vehicle’s fuel economyover the last one second of driving. To display yourinstantaneous fuel economy, press SELECT until the pointer isat INSTANT ECONOMY. Your instantaneous fuel economychanges with your driving conditions. Factors affecting fueleconomy include braking, acceleration, and road terrain. Youmay want to use this feature to see how your driving habitsaffect your fuel economy. INSTANT ECONOMY is notresettable.


100

[LG17600(ALL)10/93] Your instantaneous fuel economy can vary from 0 to 99 milesper gallon or from 99 to 2 liters per 100 kilometers when yourvehicle is moving. When your vehicle is not moving, fueleconomy is displayed as 0 miles per gallon or as a number ofliters per hour. In the metric mode, instantaneous fuel economywill display in liters per hour when your vehicle speed dropsbelow 5 km/h and will stay in liters per hour until your speedexceeds 7 km/h.

% [LG17650(ALL)10/93] AVERAGE ECONOMY

[LG17700(ALL)03/94] Your average fuel economy is the average value of your fueleconomy since the last reset. To display your average fueleconomy, press SELECT until the pointer is at AVERAGEECONOMY. The fuel computer calculates average fuel economyfrom the distance traveled and the fuel used (as reported by theElectronic Engine Control module). Press the RESET buttonwhen AVERAGE ECONOMY is selected to reset the averagefuel economy. You may want to use this feature to see howyour fuel economy changes each day or for each tank of fuel.

[LG18000(ALL)03/94] If you calculate your fuel economy based on the odometerdistance traveled and the amount of fuel you pump into thetank, your number may be different than the fuel computernumber for various reasons. Most likely, the top level of fueladded may be different between fill-ups, causing an incorrectestimate of the amount of fuel used.

% [LG18100(ALL)10/93] DISTANCE TO EMPTY

[LG18150(ALL)11/93] Your distance to empty is the approximate number of miles orkilometers that you can drive before you run out of fuel. Todisplay your distance to empty, press SELECT until the pointeris at DISTANCE TO EMPTY. The fuel computer calculatesdistance to empty from the amount of fuel in the tank and aninternally determined fuel economy value, which is not thesame as the AVERAGE ECONOMY number. DISTANCE TOEMPTY is not resettable. You may want to use this feature toplan when your next fuel fill-up should be.



101

[LG18175(ALL)03/94] Your distance to empty may change faster or slower than actualdistance traveled because your fuel economy varies withchanging driving conditions.

[LG18250(ALL)11/93] The fuel computer will automatically warn you when yourdistance to empty is low. When your distance to empty reaches50 miles (80 km), 25 miles (40 km) and 10 miles (20 km), thefuel computer will automatically select DISTANCE TO EMPTY,flash the number for five seconds, and sound a one secondchime.

[LG18275(ALL)10/93] If the Distance to Empty function displays CO or CS, you musthave the fuel indication system serviced.

[LG18300(ALL)03/94] Turn your ignition to OFF while fueling to obtain an accuratedistance to empty reading. If you do not turn your ignition off,the fuel computer will not display the new distance to emptyimmediately, but will slowly increase to the correct value.

[LG18301(ALL)10/93] AVERAGE SPEED

[LG18350(ALL)03/94] Your average speed is the average speed your vehicle hastraveled while the ignition was ON since the last reset. Todisplay your average speed, press SELECT until the pointer is atAVERAGE SPEED. Press the RESET button when AVERAGESPEED is selected to reset the average speed. You may want touse this feature to see what your average speed is during dailydriving or on a long trip.


102

% [LG18500(ALL)06/94] Auxiliary Warning Module (If equipped)[LG18600(ALL)06/94] An additional bank of indicator and warning lights is located

above the driver’s side vent, just to the right of the steeringwheel. The light(s) located in this module are described andillustrated below.

[LG18700(ALL)04/95]

13-1/2 pica art:0050122-F

The auxiliary warning module

% [LG18710(ALL)05/95] Traction Control Active Light

[LG18720(ALL)04/95] This light comes on when the Traction Control system beginsapplying and releasing the brakes and adjusting the enginecharacteristics to limit a wheelspin condition. You may feelsome steering changes and hear some noise, but this is normal.

[LG18730(ALL)04/95]

one inch art:0050274-A



103

[LG18740(ALL)04/95] The Traction Control light will stay on for a minimum of fourseconds.

[LG18750(ALL)06/95] Check Traction Assist Light

[LG18760(ALL)04/95] This light comes on when the Traction Control system is notoperating. In some conditions, you may want to turn TractionControl off, such as when rocking your vehicle out of deepsnow or mud.

[LG18770(ALL)04/95]

one inch art:0050275-A

[LG18780(ALL)04/95] Traction Control will automatically turn off to prevent thebrakes from overheating. The system will turn back on once thebrakes have cooled down.

[LG18790(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the TRAC OFF light is flashing repeatedly, it meansthat there is a Traction Control system malfunctionand the system is inoperative. Contact your dealer forservice as soon as possible.


104

% [LG18800(ALL)06/94] Anti-Theft Active Indicator Light

[LG18900(ALL)03/94] This indicator is used in the optional Anti-Theft System. See“Anti-Theft System” in the Features chapter of this OwnerGuide.

[LG18950(ALL)11/93]


The anti-theft active indicator light

[LG19000(ALL)08/94] Air Suspension Warning Light

[LG19050(ALL)08/94]


The air suspension warning light

[LG19100(ALL)08/94] The warning light for the Air Suspension indicates one of twothings:

[LG19150(ALL)08/94] 1. The service switch (located in the jack storage area) is in the“off” position.

[LG19200(ALL)08/94] 2. A system malfunction has occurred electronically disablingAir Suspension function.

[LG19250(ALL)08/94] NOTE: If the switch is returned to or in the “ON” positionand the light does not go out after recycling theignition switch OFF/ON, the Air Suspension shouldbe checked by a qualified service technician.


105

Instrument

Panel

Controls

[IP0

04

00

(ALL)0

4/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0050063-E

The

instrument

panel

File:wnips.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:23:17 1996

106

*[IP01200(ALL)01/93] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is dividedinto several different sections. Illustrations are provided for themajor parts of the instrument panel that are explained in thischapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles.

[IP01400(ALL)04/95] The controls for the climate control systems, headlamps, dimswitch, rear window defogger, fog lamps, power rear quarterwindows, Traction Control, clock/radio and the rear windowwasher and wiper are all on the instrument panel.

% [IP01425(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine)of the upper part of te instrument panel should beavoided. The dull finish in this area us to help protectthe driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

%*[IP01450(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens

*[IP01475(ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth and a glasscleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, orequivalent. Do not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner toclean the lens as these may cause scratches.

%*[IP01500(ALL)01/93] Climate Control Systems[IP01550(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a control assembly designed to

handle either a combination A/C-Heater System or aHeater-Only System. Main Heater-Only Systems are standardequipment. Main and Rear Heater-Only Systems, MainA/C-Heater Systems, and Main and Rear A/C-Heater Systemsare optional.

[IP01630(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle has a rear system, the front control will beequipped with a rear fan control knob plus another fan speedcontrol knob which is installed in the rear.

File:wnips.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:23:17 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

107

%*[IP01655(ALL)10/93] Instrument Panel Registers

[IP01665(ALL)06/94] There are four registers in the instrument panel. Each of theseregisters contain a louver assembly which can be manuallyadjusted to direct airflow UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT. Eachregister in the instrument panel also has a thumbwheel thatallows you to open or close each register. The defroster outletsare located on the top of the instrument panel while the flooroutlet is located at the bottom of the center console. Anillustration of the register, defroster, and floor outlet locationsfollows.

[IP01701(ALL)06/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050129-BThe climate control air outlet locations


108

% [IP01731(ALL)10/93] Air Conditioning (A/C) Controls — Main (Front) SystemOnly (Manual Air Conditioning)

[IP01740(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050130-CThe climate controls — main A/C

[IP01751(ALL)05/95] The Fan Speed Knob controls the volume of air circulated in thevehicle. There are four fan settings: Low, Medium Low, MediumHigh, and High.

[IP01756(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The fan will not operate when the Function SelectorKnob is in the m (OFF) position.

[IP01761(ALL)06/94] The Temperature Control Knob may be adjusted from COOL airin the blue range to WARM air in the red range.

[IP01766(ALL)06/94] NOTE: Air temperature can be adjusted for the main climatecontrol system only. Air temperature from theauxiliary heating/air conditioning system (if equipped)cannot be adjusted. Rear passengers will receive eitherFULL COOL or FULL WARM air based on the settingof the Function Selector Knob.

[IP01771(ALL)06/94] The Function Selector Knob controls air circulation and A/CCompressor Operation.



109

[IP01775(ALL)05/95] The air conditioning settings include MAX A/C, A/C and S(Panel/Floor). However, heating capabilities are also provided inthese modes. Adjust the Temperature Control Knob as necessaryto receive cool (air-conditioned) or warm (heated) air when inthese modes.

[IP01780(ALL)06/94] NOTE: The A/C compressor will only operate when outsideair temperatures are above approximately 45˚F (7˚C).

[IP01785(ALL)06/94] The climate control system provides fresh outside air in allfunction control settings except for MAX A/C and m (OFF).Only recirculated interior air is available in MAX A/C.

[IP01791(ALL)04/95] In MAX A/C, air from inside the passenger compartment isrecirculated continuously and the A/C compressor is engaged.In this position, the system provides maximum cooling,maximum dehumidifying, and greater fuel efficiency. It also hasa greater noise level because the sound of the air from theblower motor is not muffled by a closed damper door as itwould be in all other functional settings.

[IP01802(ALL)04/95] In A/C, outside air is drawn into the system and the A/Ccompressor is engaged. The cooling process and the distributionof cooled air is the same as that provided with MAX A/C.Because outside air is drawn into the system, it will not havethe advantage of cooling already cooled air. It will have a lowernoise level because a closed damper door muffles the sound ofthe air from the blower motor.

[IP01812(ALL)06/94] In Q (PANEL), air is drawn from the outside and directed intothe passenger compartment through the instrument panelregisters. The temperature of the air can be varied by adjustingthe Temperature Control Knob. This mode is normally used as avent setting. The A/C compressor does not operate in thismode, only heating capabilities are provided.


110

[IP01822(ALL)08/94] In m (OFF), air supply is shut off from all outlets and allblower motor operation is stopped. Use this setting whendriving through an area where outside air is unpleasant ordusty.

[IP01852(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Operating with the Function Selector Knob in OFF or inMAX A/C for extended periods of time in cold weathercan result in fog buildup on interior glass surfaces.

[IP01857(ALL)05/95] This fogging can make it difficult to see the road for safedriving. Operating in the A/C, Q (PANEL), S(PANEL/FLOOR), R (FLOOR), P (DEFROST/FLOOR) andV (DEFROST) positions will help prevent fogging. Adjust thetemperature as necessary for comfort.

[IP01862(ALL)05/95] In S (PANEL/FLOOR), approximately equal amounts ofairflow are directed to the instrument panel registers and thefloor outlets. This setting will engage the A/C compressor, thusproviding you with an additional A/C mode.

[IP01872(ALL)05/95] In R (FLOOR), most of the system’s air supply is directed tothe floor outlets with a small amount going to the windshieldand side window demisters.

[IP01882(ALL)04/95] In P (DEFROST/FLOOR), approximately equal amounts of airare directed to the windshield and floor outlets with a smallamount to the side windows.

[IP01886(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If outside air temperatures are above approximately45˚F (7˚C), the P (DEFROST/FLOOR) and V(DEFROST) positions will also automatically engagethe air-conditioning compressor in order to reduce thehumidity in the air and aid in clearing the insideglass. Adjust the Temperature Control Knob asnecessary for comfort.



111

[IP01892(ALL)06/94] In V (DEFROST), most of the air is directed through thedefrosters and onto the windshield. A small amount is divertedto the floor.

*[IP01895(ALL)08/94] Heater Controls (Heater-Only Vehicles)

[IP01900(ALL)06/94] The fan speed, temperature, and function controls are essentiallythe same as the A/C controls described previously with theexception that the control assembly has no function settings forMAX A/C and A/C and no A/C compressor operation isprovided in any of the function settings. An illustration of thecontrol for a heater-only system follows.

[IP01912(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050238-CClimate control panel — Heater-Only System

*[IP01951(ALL)06/94] Turning On the Heat

[IP01961(ALL)10/93] Heat will not be available until the engine has been running forsufficient time as indicated by the engine coolant temperaturegauge.

*[IP01971(ALL)10/93] To heat the inside of your vehicle:

[IP01976(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the Function Selector Knob to R (FLOOR). Outsideair is drawn in and directed into the passenger compartmentthrough the floor outlets. Small quantities of air are alsodirected to the defrost and side window demist outlets.


112

[IP01992(ALL)06/94] 2. Turn the Temperature Control Knob toward the WARM(red) area.

[IP02002(ALL)06/94] 3. Turn the Fan Speed Knob to the speed of your choice. Whenyour vehicle warms up, you may want to set the Fan SpeedKnob to a lower speed, or adjust the Temperature ControlKnob to a lower setting to maintain a comfortabletemperature.

*[IP02012(ALL)10/93] To defrost the windshield and side windows:

[IP02016(ALL)08/94] ■ Turn the Function Selector Knob to V (DEFROST), turn theTemperature Control Knob to the WARM (red) area and turnthe Fan Speed Knob to the position of your choice.

*[IP02021(ALL)10/93] To heat and defrost at the same time:

[IP02031(ALL)04/95] ■ Turn the Function Selector Knob to P(DEFROST/FLOOR),turn the Temperature Control Knob andthe Fan Speed Knob to provide the temperature and fanspeed you prefer.

[IP02050(ALL)06/94] Do not place objects under the front seats unless your vehicle isequipped with an under seat storage tray. Improperly storedobjects will interfere with the flow of air to the back seats.

[IP02060(ALL)06/94] Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the area below thewindshield on the outside of your vehicle. They could block theair intake.

[IP02070(ALL)06/94] Heating and Air Conditioning System

*[IP02075(ALL)06/94] Turning On the Heat

[IP02080(ALL)06/94] You can heat the inside of your vehicle and defrost thewindshield using the Function Selector Knob located in thecontrol assembly in the instrument panel.

[IP02085(ALL)05/95] The seven function selector modes are: MAX A/C, AC, Q(PANEL), S (PANEL/FLOOR), R (FLOOR), P(DEFROST/FLOOR), and V (DEFROST). If your vehicle is



113

equipped with a rear seat climate control system, the instrumentpanel will also include a rear seat climate control knob. To turnon the rear passenger compartment control system, select REARCTRL, Medium Low, Medium High, or High. With the knob setto REAR CTRL, rear seat passengers will have control of rearfan speed on the rear seat climate control panel. PositionsMedium Low, Medium High, or High will control rear fanspeed from the front control panel.

[IP02090(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050059-DThe climate controls — main and auxiliary system A/C — Heater System — ifequipped

[IP02095(ALL)04/95] The standard heating system and the heating portion of theheating and air conditioning system are essentially identical.There is one exception, however; the air conditioningcompressor will automatically engage when the P(DEFROST/FLOOR) or V (DEFROST) position is selected toaid in defogging and defrosting the inside glass when theoutside temperature is above approximately 45˚F (7˚C). Refer tothe heating system operating instructions covered previously fora more detailed explanation of heating system operation.


114

[IP02126(ALL)10/93] Turning on the Air Conditioner

*[IP02132(ALL)09/93] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather:

[IP02142(ALL)06/94] 1. Turn the Function Selector Knob to MAX A/C.

[IP02144(ALL)06/94] 2. Turn the Temperature Control Knob to COOL.

[IP02154(ALL)06/94] 3. Turn the Fan Speed Knob to the position of your choice.

[IP02164(ALL)05/95] 4. If your vehicle is equipped with the rear passengercompartment air conditioning unit, it will be on when thefront system is on MAX A/C, A/C or PANEL/FLOOR andthe rear climate control knob is set to REAR CTRL, MediumLow, Medium High, or High. Refer to the previous sectionfor an explanation of the heating system.

[IP02174(ALL)10/93] 5. Adjust your instrument panel registers.

[IP02184(ALL)03/94] 6. If the inside of your vehicle is very warm, you may want todrive for a few minutes with the windows down and the airconditioner on. This forces most of the hot, stale air out ofthe vehicle and allows the air conditioner to cool the interiormore quickly.

*[IP02194(ALL)05/95] The air conditioner may be used to cool the outside air beingdrawn into your vehicle, but using recirculated air is moreeconomical and cools your vehicle more quickly.

*[IP02202(ALL)07/93] Cooling your vehicle with outside air

[IP02212(ALL)10/93] Cooling your vehicle with air conditioned outside air is quieterbut less economical than using recirculated air. It also has lesscooling capacity.

[IP02222(ALL)10/93] To cool your vehicle with outside air:

[IP02232(ALL)06/94] 1. Turn the Function Selector Knob to the A/C or S(PANEL/FLOOR).

[IP02242(ALL)06/94] 2. Turn the Temperature Control Knob to COOL.



115

[IP02252(ALL)06/94] 3. Turn the Fan Speed Knob to the position of your choice.

[IP02262(ALL)10/93] 4. Make sure that the registers in the instrument panel are openand adjusted to the positions of your choice.

[IP02272(ALL)06/94] During periods of high humidity, vapor may be emitted fromthe air outlets when using the A/C with outside air. Correctthis by switching the Function Control Knob to MAX A/C.

*[IP02282(ALL)06/94] Improving fuel economy

[IP02292(ALL)06/94] Whenever you turn on the air conditioning, your vehicle usesmore fuel because the air conditioning compressor is running.To get better fuel economy while cooling your vehicle, do notuse the air conditioner on mild days. Instead, set the functioncontrol knob to Q (PANEL) and turn the temperature controlknob to COOL.

*[IP02302(ALL)04/95] Operating tips

[IP02307(ALL)08/94] To vary the temperature inside your vehicle, move theTemperature Control Knob toward WARM (red) for warmertemperatures and toward COOL (blue) for cooler temperatures.The Temperature Control Knob setting determines thetemperature of the air being discharged from the system in alloperating modes (heating or A/C).

[IP02312(ALL)08/94] When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,place the automatic transaxle gearshift selector lever in Park (P)or in Neutral (N). This aids in engine cooling and airconditioner efficiency. (If the engine overheats, turn theFunction Selector Knob to Q (PANEL) and turn theTemperature Control Knob to WARM.)

*[IP02316(ALL)10/93] When your vehicle’s engine is operated at full throttle, the airconditioner compressor will automatically be turned off to allowmaximum engine power. This may occur during passing orwhen climbing steep grades. The compressor will return tonormal operation within a few seconds after full throttle is nolonger needed.


116

[IP02318(ALL)06/94] NOTE: The compressor will not operate when the outsidetemperature is less than about 45˚F (7˚C).

% [IP02322(ALL)04/95] Rear Climate Control System (If equipped)[IP02332(ALL)04/95] If your vehicle is equipped with a rear climate control system,

the rear seat occupants can select their own personal fan speedsettings.

[IP02342(ALL)05/95] The rear seat climate control system is controlled from the mainclimate control system on the instrument panel. If the rearpassenger compartment climate control knob in the front climatecontrol panel is set in OFF, the fan in the rear seat climatecontrol system will also be off. If the knob is set in any of thefan speed positions (Medium Low, Medium High, or High), airwill be discharged from the rear seat vents at the correspondingspeed. However, when the knob is set at REAR CTRL, rear seatpassengers can control their own fan speed.

[IP02362(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050048-D

Rear fan control knob

[IP02366(ALL)05/95] The rear passenger compartment climate control panel has a FanSpeed Knob which controls the speed (Low, Medium Low,Medium High, or High) at which air is discharged from theregisters whenever the Rear Control Knob on the front panelclimate control panel is in REAR CTRL.

[IP02380(ALL)05/95] Front passengers determine the temperature and location of theairflow for rear passengers by setting the Function SelectorKnob in the front climate control panel in either a heat or A/Cmode.



117

[IP02400(ALL)04/95] If an A/C mode is chosen, rear passengers will receive FULLCOOL (air-conditioned) air out of the side and upper rearregisters. If a heat mode or the Q (PANEL) mode is chosen,rear passengers will receive FULL WARM (heated) air out ofthe lower rear registers.

[IP02420(ALL)04/95] Rear passengers do not have the ability to adjust thetemperature or select the location of the airflow from theauxiliary climate control system. Rear passengers can adjust theRear Fan Speed Control Knob and air discharge (adjustregisters) for comfort.

[IP02500(ALL)08/94] NOTE: For maximum heating and cooling for front seatpassengers, set the rear fan switch to the m (OFF)position.

*[IP09300(ALL)04/95] Liftgate Window Features%*[IP09400(ALL)05/95] Rear Window Defogger (If equipped)

(Standard in Canada)

*[IP09500(ALL)04/95] The defogger for the rear liftgate window clears frost, fog, orthin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window.The defogger operates with the ignition in the ON position.

[IP09600(ALL)09/93] The control switch is located on the instrument panel to theright of the steering column and below the climate controlsystem.


118

[IP09700(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050036-BThe rear defogger switch

*[IP09800(ALL)02/95] To defrost the rear window:

*[IP09900(ALL)02/95] 1. Clear any snow from the rear window.

*[IP10000(ALL)02/95] 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine.

[IP10100(ALL)10/93] 3. Press the rear defogger switch.

[IP10200(ALL)11/93] The defogger turns off automatically after 10 minutes. If thewindow is not clear, turn the defogger on again. It willautomatically shut off anytime the engine is turned off or if theswitch is depressed a second time.

[IP10250(ALL)03/94] NOTE: Operating the rear defogger will also turn on theheated side view mirrors (if equipped).

*[IP10300(ALL)04/95] Never use sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners toclean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you maydamage the wires that are bonded to the inside of the rearwindow, and cause damage to the rear window defogger.



119

% [IP10400(ALL)08/94] Rear Wiper and Washer (If equipped)

[IP10500(ALL)11/93] The controls for the rear wiper and washer can be found on theinstrument panel to the right of the instrument cluster below theclimate control system. The rear wiper and washer controlsoperate with the ignition in the ACC or ON positions.

[IP10600(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050037-AThe rear wiper switches

[IP10700(ALL)03/94] To turn on the rear wiper, press the rear wiper switch. Thewiper will operate until it is turned off. To turn off the rearwiper, press the wiper switch a second time.

[IP10800(ALL)03/94] To activate the rear washer, press the rear washer switch. Spraywill continue as long as the button is depressed. When youactivate the wash system, the wiper will also activate. The wipercan be turned off by pressing the wiper switch a second time.

*[IP10900(ALL)04/95] Do not activate the washer for longer than fifteen secondscontinuously. This could damage the washer pump system.


120

% [IP11600(ALL)12/93] Power Quarter Vent Windows (If equipped)[IP11700(ALL)03/94] The power rear quarter vent windows operate with the ignition

in the ON or ACC positions. The vent windows are controlledby the right and left switches located in the center of theinstrument panel, just to the right of the rear defogger. Press theindented side of the switch to open the windows; press theraised side of the switch to close the windows.

[IP11800(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050034-AThe power quarter window switches

% [IP12100(ALL)12/93] Exterior Lamps

*[IP12200(ALL)01/94] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, marker lamps, licenseplate lamps, tail lamps and instrument panel lights, use theheadlamp control knob, to the left of the instrument cluster.

*[IP12300(ALL)01/93] 1. Turn the headlamp knob to the first position to turn on theparking lamps, license plate lamps, tail lamps, marker lampsand instrument panel lights.

*[IP12400(ALL)05/95] 2. Turn the headlamp knob to the second position to turn onthe headlamps in addition to the parking lamps, tail lamps,license plate lamps, marker lamps and instrument panellights.



121

[IP12500(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050040-AThe headlamp controls

%*[IP12510(ALL)04/95] Fog Lamps (If equipped)

[IP12525(ALL)08/94] The fog lamp switch is located on the center of the instrumentpanel.

[IP12535(ALL)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050232-AFog lamp switch

*[IP12538(ALL)02/93] The fog lamps act as a supplement to the low beam headlampsunder limited visibility conditions such as rain, snow, dust orfog and operate only when the low beam headlamps are on.


122

*[IP12541(ALL)02/93] To maximize fog lamp bulb life it is recommended that the foglamp switch be turned off after each use prior to turning off theheadlamps.

*[IP12544(ALL)10/94] ■ To turn the fog lamps on, push the switch. An indicator lightwill glow when the lamps are on.

*[IP12547(ALL)10/94] ■ To turn off, push the switch again.

%*[IP12550(ALL)03/95] “Headlamps On” Alert Chime

[IP12601(ALL)03/94] The “headlamps on” alert chime acts as an indicator that youhave left the headlamps or parking lights on. This continuouschime will activate when the following conditions are present:

[IP12620(ALL)03/94] ■ The headlamp and/or parking lamps are on

[IP12640(ALL)03/94] ■ There is no key in the ignition

[IP12660(ALL)05/94] ■ The driver’s door is ajar (open)

%*[IP12700(ALL)01/93] Daytime Running Light (DRL) System(Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP12800(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is designed to turnthe high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output andwithout illuminating the high beam indicator lamp in theinstrument panel. The DRL system operates when all of thefollowing conditions are met:

*[IP12900(ALL)01/93] ■ the vehicle is “running”

*[IP13000(ALL)01/93] ■ the vehicle has a fully released parking brake

*[IP13100(ALL)01/93] ■ the headlamp system is in the OFF position

*[IP13200(ALL)01/93] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker when the engineis turned on or off. This is a normal condition.



123

*[IP13300(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will notilluminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn onyour headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

%*[IP13320(ALL)02/95] Setting the Autolamp Delay System (If equipped)

[IP13340(ALL)04/95] By using the autolamp, you can set the headlamps to:

*[IP13350(ALL)09/93] ■ turn on the headlamps automatically at night

*[IP13360(ALL)09/93] ■ turn off the headlamps automatically during daylight

[IP13370(ALL)09/93] ■ keep the headlamps on for up to three minutes after youturn the key to OFF.

[IP13380(ALL)10/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050157-AThe autolamp system


124

[IP13391(ALL)03/94] Setting the autolamp

[IP13401(ALL)11/93] This feature allows the Autolamp circuit to be adjusted, to thedriver’s liking, for the headlamps to turn on for the amount ofambient light. If the driver desires the headlamps to come onearlier when the sky is brighter or later when the sky is darker,then the following procedure should be performed to satisfy thedriver’s requirement.

[IP13410(ALL)03/94] Move the Autolamp Delay slider knob to the far left positionwith the vehicle in park and ignition in the RUN position. Thenpress the mirror DIM and Autolamp ON switchessimultaneously. The Autolamp ON LED will flash, indicating it’sinto the special mode. Slowly slide the Autolamp Delay controlto the right until the DIM LED is on steadily. This indicates thecurrent setting for the early/late headlamp. (The factory settingwould fall in the middle of the control slide range.)

[IP13420(ALL)03/94] If earlier activation of the headlamps is desired, slide theAutolamp Delay slider knob to the left. The DIM LED will startflashing, indicating that the setting is being changed. The furtherleft the control is moved the earlier the headlamps will comeon. Pressing the Autolamp button will enter the new setting andreturn the mirror back to normal operation.

[IP13430(ALL)03/94] If later activation of the headlamps is desired, slide theAutolamp Delay slider knob to the right. The DIM LED willstart flashing, indicating that the setting is being changed. Thefurther right the control is moved, the later the headlamps willcome on. Pressing the Autolamp switch will enter the newsetting and return the mirror back to the normal operation.

*[IP13440(ALL)03/93] To turn the autolamp off, press the On/Off button. Theindicator light will turn off.



125

*[IP13460(ALL)01/95] To keep the lamps on after you leave your vehicle:

*[IP13470(ALL)10/94] ■ Move the slider knob to the right. Once the slider knob is tothe right, it controls how long the lamps stay on.

*[IP13480(ALL)12/93] ■ The further you move the slide knob toward the right, thelonger the headlamps stay on after you leave your vehicle.Similarly, if you move the slide knob only slightly towardthe left, the headlamps stay on for only a moment after youturn your vehicle off.

%*[IP13485(ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP13490(ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasivecleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches orcrack the lamps.

% [IP13501(ALL)11/93] Interior Lamps%*[IP13550(ALL)01/93] Lighting Up the Instrument Panel

[IP13560(ALL)03/94] The instrument panel lights can be turned on by turning theheadlamp control knob to either the first or second position.You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by rotatingthe dim switch up or down to the desired brightness. The dimswitch is located to the right of the steering column next to theradio.


126

[IP13580(ALL)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050041-BThe dim switch

% [IP13601(ALL)11/93] Front Dome Lamp

[IP13603(ALL)06/94] Front dome lamp, rear cargo and second row reading lamp maybe turned on and off using the dimmer switch.

[IP13605(ALL)09/93] The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driverand front passenger seats.

[IP13610(ALL)09/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050164-BThe front dome lamp and map lamps



127

% [IP13630(ALL)06/94] Turning on the map lamps (If equipped)

[IP13640(ALL)12/93] Your vehicle may have a map lamp for the passenger and onefor the driver. The map lamps and switches are located on thefront dome lamp.

[IP13660(ALL)10/93] The rear cargo lamp is located overhead near the rear seatingpositions.

[IP13680(ALL)06/94] Second Row Reading Lamp

[IP13690(ALL)06/94] The second row reading lamp may be turned on by using therocker switch located on the lamp assembly or by using theinstrument panel dimmer switch.

[IP13700(ALL)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050233-ASecond row reading lamp


128

%*[IP13730(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP13760(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic andshould be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinsethem with clear water.

*[IP18000(ALL)04/95] Clock Controls on Electronic Radios[IP18100(ALL)03/94] The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For complete

operating instructions, refer to the Electronic Sound Systemschapter of this Owner Guide.

%*[IP18200(ALL)05/92] Radio Antenna

*[IP18300(ALL)07/93] The fixed radio antenna is mounted on the front fender on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.


129

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00900(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed togive you easy access to the controls while you are driving.

*[SC01000(ALL)01/93] Turn Signal Lever

*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steeringcolumn to:

*[SC01200(ALL)01/93] ■ operate the turn signals.

*[SC01300(ALL)01/93] ■ turn the headlamps to high beam.

*[SC01400(ALL)01/93] ■ flash the headlamps.

*[SC01500(ALL)01/93] ■ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off.

%*[SC01600(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

[SC01700(ALL)02/95] To turn on the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up.The right-side arrow on the instrument panel will flash.

[SC01800(ALL)02/95] To turn on the left turn signal, pull the turn signal lever down.The left-side arrow on the instrument panel will flash.

*[SC01900(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040085-D

The turn signal lever

[SC02000(ALL)02/95] Usually, the turn signals turn off automatically after you turnyour vehicle. If the turn signal continues to flash after you havemade the turn, pull the lever back to the neutral position.

File:wnscs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:22:27 1996

130

[SC02100(ALL)02/95] To indicate a lane change to the right, push the turn signallever up slightly (without latching) and hold it in position. Toindicate a lane change to the left, pull the turn signal leverdown slightly (without latching) and hold it in position. Thelever will return to the OFF position when you release it.

*[SC02200(ALL)05/94] If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does notilluminate or remains on (does not flash) when you signal aturn, the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have thiscondition corrected as soon as possible, and use the acceptedhand signals until the turn signal system is repaired.

%*[SC02220(ALL)03/95] High Beams

*[SC02226(ALL)01/93] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamps on and pushthe turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When thehigh beams are on, the high beam indicator light on theinstrument panel is illuminated.

*[SC02230(ALL)01/93] To return to the low beam setting, pull the turn signal levertoward you until it latches back into the neutral position. Thehigh beam indicator light turns off.

*[SC02235(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040086-D

High beam and flash-to-pass operation

%*[SC02700(ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights

*[SC02800(ALL)01/93] To flash the headlamps, pull the turn signal lever toward youfor a moment and then release it. The high beam headlampswill flash whether the headlamps are on or off.



131

%*[SC03100(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer%*[SC03200(ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers

[SC03300(ALL)11/93] Your vehicle has wipers that operate at varying intervals. Forexample, you can set the interval so they wipe less often inlight rain or more often in heavier rain. The wiper delays rangefrom about 1.5 to 20 seconds.

*[SC03400(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica art:0040087-E

Variable interval wiper control

*[SC03500(ALL)01/93] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turnsignal lever to the most effective interval. The farther the knobis from the OFF position, the faster the wipers move.

[SC03510(ALL)12/93] Speed Dependent Wipers

[SC03520(ALL)01/95] This feature compensates for the extra moisture thataccumulates on your windshield at higher speeds during rain.At higher speeds, the Speed Dependent feature shortens thedelay between wipes when you use the variable interval wipers.Delay will automatically adjust at speeds between 10 and65 mph (16 and 105 km/h).


132

[SC03530(ALL)12/93] The Speed Dependent feature comes disabled from the factory,but can be activated at any time by using the followingprocedure.

[SC03560(ALL)12/93] 1. Make sure the two front doors are securely closed.

[SC03570(ALL)04/95] 2. Insert the key into the ignition and turn first to the ONposition (the gauges on the instrument panel will notilluminate) and then back to the OFF position. Remove thekey and within 30 seconds:

[SC03575(ALL)12/93] 3. Press and hold the washer button on the end of the turnsignal lever.

[SC03580(ALL)04/95] 4. Within two seconds, put the key back in the ignition andturn to the ON position.

[SC03585(ALL)06/94] 5. Hold the washer button down until a long (two second) toneis heard. Release the button while the tone is active.

[SC03591(ALL)12/93] 6. After the long tone, a confirmation sequence will be heard.One beep indicates the feature is inactive. Two beepsindicates the feature is active.

[SC03595(ALL)12/93] Repeat this procedure any time you want to cancel or reactivatethe Speed Dependent feature.

*[SC03600(ALL)04/95] Windshield Washer

[SC03700(ALL)08/94] To clean the windshield, push in the washer button on the endof the turn signal lever. For a constant spray, push and hold thebutton. If the windshield wipers are off, one momentary pushresults in one wipe and a longer push in three wipes andactivation of washer fluid. If the windshield wipers are ininterval mode a quick tap results in two wipe cycles and alonger tap in three wipes and washer fluid activation.

*[SC03800(ALL)01/93] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluidcontainer is empty and never activate the washers for more thanfifteen seconds continuously. This could damage the washerpump system.



133

*[SC03900(ALL)01/93]RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze onthe windshield and obscure your vision. Always warmup the windshield with the defroster before you use thewasher fluid. If you cannot see through the windshieldclearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC04000(ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacingyour windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid andWipers in the Index.

%*[SC04100(ALL)01/93] Gearshift Lever[SC04200(ALL)06/94] The gearshift lever on your vehicle is mounted on the steering

column. On the end of the gearshift lever is the OverdriveOn/Off button and the OVERDRIVE OFF lamp. For additionalinformation about the gearshift lever and the Overdrive On/Offbutton, see the Driving Your Vehicle chapter.

[SC04300(ALL)09/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050016-A The gearshift lever


134

*[SC04320(ALL)11/93] OVERDRIVE OFF Lamp

[SC04330(ALL)06/94] This lamp indicates the operating range of the transaxle. Thislamp will illuminate when the Overdrive On/Off button isdepressed.

[SC04340(ALL)03/94]

6 pica art:0050187-C

OVERDRIVE OFF lamp location

[SC04350(ALL)05/95] With the transaxle range selector in the Overdrive j range, theOVERDRIVE OFF lamp will not be illuminated. The transaxlewill be allowed to upshift and downshift from 1st through 4thgears. When the Overdrive on/off button is depressed, theOVERDRIVE OFF lamp will illuminate. The transaxle will nowonly upshift and downshift from 1st through 3rd gears. Thevehicle will always return to the overdrive operation modewhen the ignition is turned off and back on.

[SC04360(ALL)06/94] If the lamp does not come on when the Overdrive ON/OFFbutton is depressed or if the lamp flashes when you are driving,have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to the transaxle.

%*[SC04400(ALL)01/95] Horn[SC04410(ALL)09/93] To sound the horn, press the center of the steering wheel. Check

the horn regularly to make sure it operates properly.



135

[SC04415(ALL)09/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050017-A The horn pad

%*[SC04610(ALL)04/95] Hazard Flasher Switch

*[SC04620(ALL)04/95] The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardoussituations.

*[SC04630(ALL)09/93] The hazard flasher switch operates the same lamps as the turnsignal lever. When the hazard flasher is activated, all of theselamps will flash on and off. The turn signal indicators cannot beused when the hazard lamps are flashing. Operation of thehazard flashers does not affect operation of the brakelamps.

*[SC04640(ALL)12/93] The flashers work even with the key out of the ignition. Theflashers will work for up to two hours when the battery is fullycharged and in good condition. They will not drain the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or ifyour battery is not fully charged, your battery may be drainedto the point where the vehicle will not start.

[SC04650(ALL)09/93] The hazard flasher switch is located on top of the steeringcolumn.


136

*[SC04660(ALL)09/93] To use the hazard flasher:

*[SC04670(ALL)02/94] 1. Push the HAZARD switch; you will see the turn signalarrows flash.

*[SC04680(ALL)09/93] 2. To stop the hazard flashers, push the HAZARD switch again.

%*[SC04700(ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering (If equipped)[SC04800(ALL)02/95] With the tilt steering option, you can move your steering wheel

up or down.

[SC04900(ALL)10/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050101-ATilt steering release lever location



137

*[SC05000(ALL)03/95] To change the position of the steering column:

[SC05100(ALL)02/95] 1. Make sure your vehicle is stopped.

*[SC05200(ALL)03/95] 2. Pull the tilt release lever on the column toward you.

[SC05300(ALL)02/95] 3. Tilt the steering wheel up or down until you find the bestposition for you.

[SC05400(ALL)02/95] 4. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

[SC05500(ALL)02/95] Be sure the steering wheel is locked in place. It can only beadjusted to specific positions. Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is in motion.

%*[SC05600(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC07500(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you can automaticallymaintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h).

[SC07515(ALL)05/95] When driving in hilly terrain, at high elevations, or whenpulling a trailer, it may be desirable to drive in the OverdriveLockout mode. This can be done by depressing the O/D buttonon the end of the gearshift lever. Driving in this mode helpsprevent excessive transaxle shifting and helps speed control tomaintain speed when going down steep hills.

*[SC07530(ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the CanadianRadio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approvedmay cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use onlyproperly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

[SC07560(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using the speedcontrol. This will cause the engine to overspeed.


138

[SC08001(ALL)06/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050018-A The speed control switches on the steering wheel

*[SC08200(ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:

[SC08300(ALL)08/94] 1. Find the speed control switches on the steering wheel.

*[SC08400(ALL)03/95] 2. Press and release the ON switch.

*[SC08500(ALL)03/95] 3. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (50 km/h)using the accelerator pedal.

*[SC08601(ALL)03/95] 4. Make sure you are driving faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).

[SC08610(ALL)05/94] 5. Press SET ACCEL and release it immediately. This will setyour speed. If you keep this switch pressed, your speed willcontinue to increase and will not be set at the desired speed.

[SC08620(ALL)01/95] 6. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle willmaintain the speed you set.

*[SC08630(ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle maymomentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speedcontrol is on. This is normal.



139

[SC09010(ALL)05/95] NOTE: On a downhill grade, if your speed increases aboveyour set speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on adownhill grade, you may want to downshift to Third(3) gear to reduce vehicle speed. To do this, push theOverdrive ON/OFF button on the end of the gearshiftlever. The OVERDRIVE OFF lamp will illuminatewhen you press the switch.

[SC09020(ALL)05/95] You may want to drive in 3 (Third) when driving in hillyterrain, at high altitudes, or when pulling a trailer. This willimprove speed control performance.

[SC09030(ALL)06/94] NOTE: When driving uphill, especially with a heavy load,you may notice your speed decreasing even if youhave the speed control set. If the speed drops morethan 8 to 14 mph (13-23 km/h) it is normal for theautomatic speed control feature to be cancelled. Youmay need to use the accelerator pedal to help yourvehicle maintain the selected speed when driving upsteep grades.

*[SC09100(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, slippery, or unpaved.

[SC09200(ALL)09/93] Accelerating With the Speed Control On

[SC09300(ALL)03/94] If you want to speed up momentarily, or regain preset speed onhills when the speed control is on, accelerate using theaccelerator pedal. Manually accelerating to a higher speed doesnot interfere with the speed control. When you take your footoff the accelerator, your vehicle returns to the set speed.


140

%*[SC09400(ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control

*[SC09410(ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use one of thefollowing procedures:

*[SC09415(ALL)03/95] ■ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch. Release theswitch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

*[SC09420(ALL)03/95] ■ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains thedesired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately.

[SC09425(ALL)04/95] ■ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly release the COASTswitch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed willdecrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause theset speed to decrease in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).For example, if the current set speed is 60 mph (97 km/h) 5taps of the COAST switch will decrease the vehicle speedand SET it at 55 mph (88 km/h).

*[SC09430(ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph (50 km/h) by any ofthe above methods, then you must manually accelerate to aspeed over 30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.

*[SC09435(ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, follow one ofthese procedures:

*[SC09440(ALL)03/95] ■ ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL switch. Releasethe switch when the vehicle has accelerated to the desiredspeed.

*[SC09445(ALL)03/95] ■ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains thedesired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately.



141

[SC09450(ALL)04/95] ■ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the SET ACCELswitch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed willincrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause theset speed to increase in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Forexample, if the current set speed is 55 mph (88 km/h), fivetaps of the SET ACCEL switch will increase the vehiclespeed and set it at 60 mph (97 km/h).

[SC10525(ALL)04/95] To Cancel or Turn Off Speed Control

[SC10530(ALL)05/95] The speed control can be cancelled at any time by depressingthe brake pedal slightly. After cancelling, you can return to thespeed you set by pressing the RESUME switch, or set a newspeed by pressing the SET ACCEL or COAST switch.

[SC10550(ALL)03/94] Speed control can also be cancelled when you press the OFFswitch. The speed control system will remain off until you pressthe ON switch and reset the speed control.

*[SC10700(ALL)04/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turnthe vehicle off.

%*[SC10900(ALL)03/95] Resuming a Set Speed

*[SC11000(ALL)07/94] If you press the brake pedal, the speed control is cancelled. Youcan return to the speed you set by using the RSM switch, aslong as you did not press the OFF switch.

*[SC11200(ALL)05/95] To resume the speed you had before, you must be driving atleast 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC11300(ALL)11/94] Press and release the RESUME switch. Your vehicle graduallyreturns to the previously set speed and then maintains it.


142

%[SC11400(ALL)05/95] Speed Control Light (Electronic Cluster Only)

*[SC11500(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when you turn on the speed control systemand set the speed. The light will be on whenever the speedcontrol is set, even if you override the set speed by pressing theaccelerator pedal or by pressing the coast button. The light willgo off when the brakes are used or the speed control system isturned off.

[SC11600(ALL)11/93] This light comes on briefly during the display self-test everytime you turn your ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill go off when the key is turned to the START position. Thelight should stay off when the self-test is done.

*[SC11700(ALL)05/95] This light does not indicate any problems with the speed controlsystem, but is a convenience to tell you when the speed controlsystem is actively maintaining a set speed.


143

Features

*[FV00300(ALL)03/95] Your vehicle is designed with innovative and state-of-the-artfeatures. Understanding how these features work can makedriving your vehicle more comfortable.

%*[FV01400(ALL)01/95] Doors

*[FV01500(ALL)01/93] For information on the liftgate refer to the Liftgate section laterin this chapter.

*[FV02400(ALL)01/93] Sliding Door

*[FV02500(ALL)01/93] The sliding door allows rear seat passengers to enter and exiteasily.

[FV02900(ALL)03/94] To open the sliding door from inside of the vehicle, pull thehandle toward the rear of the vehicle. The door will stay open ifyou slide it all the way back until the detent at the bottom ofthe door engages.

[FV02920(ALL)10/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050119-A The inside sliding door handle

[FV03000(ALL)10/93] To close the door, pull the handle toward the front of thevehicle and slide the door. Be sure it is fully closed.

File:wnfvs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:21:54 1996

144

[FV03050(ALL)10/93] To open the sliding door from outside the vehicle, unlock thedoor then unlatch the sliding door by pulling the handlestraight out and sliding the door back.

[FV03075(ALL)06/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050120-B The outside sliding door handle

[FV03080(ALL)09/93] Memory Lock

[FV03085(ALL)03/94] If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or theremote transmitter while the sliding door is open, the door willautomatically lock after it is closed.

%*[FV03100(ALL)01/93] Childproof Lock for the Sliding Door

%*[FV03200(ALL)01/93] Your vehicle has a childproof lock for the sliding door. If youset the childproof lock, the sliding door cannot be opened frominside the vehicle.

*[FV03300(ALL)01/93] This lock will keep children from opening the door from theinside; the door can still be opened from the outside if the dooris unlocked.


Features

145

[FV03400(ALL)11/93]

24 pica art:0050082-B

Childproof lock location

*[FV03500(ALL)01/93] To set the childproof lock:

*[FV03600(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the sliding door.

[FV03700(ALL)10/93] 2. Find the childproof lock lever below the label.

[FV03800(ALL)11/93] 3. Push the lever to the up position.


146

*[FV03900(ALL)03/95] To release the childproof lock:

*[FV04000(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the sliding door from the outside.

[FV04100(ALL)11/93] 2. Push the lever to the down position.

%*[FV04200(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV04300(ALL)09/93] The power door lock control switches are located in the panelsof the front doors. They control the locks on both front doors,the sliding door and the liftgate. To lock all doors, push theraised side of the switch. To unlock the doors, push the recessedside of the switch.

[FV04400(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050029-AThe power door lock switch

[FV04450(ALL)08/94] Door locks can also be operated from the power door lockswitch in the cargo area.


Features

147

[FV04460(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050186-AThe power door lock switch in the cargo area

*[FV04500(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If the sliding door is open when all doors are lockedwith the power door lock switch, the sliding doorautomatically locks when it is closed.

*[FV04600(ALL)01/93] You can manually lock and unlock the doors using the manualdoor locks to override the power locks.

% [FV04780(ALL)11/93] Using the Keyless Entry System(If equipped)

[FV04800(ALL)06/94] If you have chosen the keyless entry system option for yourvehicle, you can lock or unlock the doors and liftgate withoutusing a key. The keypad is above the outside door handle onthe driver’s side. See also Remote Entry System which followsthis description.


148

[FV04900(ALL)10/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050107-A The keyless entry system keypad

[FV05110(ALL)04/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were given a computercode that operates the system for your vehicle. For yourconvenience, we have duplicated this code in two places.

*[FV05120(ALL)02/95] The code is:

*[FV05130(ALL)02/95] ■ on your owner’s wallet card found in the glove compartment

*[FV05145(ALL)02/95] ■ taped to the computer module

[FV05160(ALL)04/95] When you use the keyless entry system, the illuminated entrysystem turns on the interior lights for 25 seconds and thebuttons on the keypad light up for five seconds.

*[FV05170(ALL)01/93] Do not push the keypad buttons with a key, ball-point pen,pencil, or any other hard object since they could damage thebuttons.

%*[FV05200(ALL)02/95] Using the Keyless Entry System

*[FV05300(ALL)02/95] To operate the Keyless Entry System, you must be familiar withthe “personal code” and the “permanent code.” The personalcode is a code number that you select that is easy for you to


Features

149

remember. This is the number that you enter on the keypad tounlock the door. The personal code can be changed as often asyou like.

[FV05400(ALL)02/95] The permanent code is a number that is assigned to yourvehicle and can be used to program your personal code into thesystem.

[FV05500(ALL)02/95] For your convenience, one additional piece of tape with thepermanent code has been included in the glove box. Place thisadditional piece of tape in a safe location where you can referto it when necessary. Do not put it in any location that isaccessible to unauthorized persons, since this would allow thementrance to your vehicle.

%*[FV06200(ALL)02/95] Programming your Personal Code

[FV06250(ALL)02/95] A personal code does not replace the permanent code that thedealership gave you. The original dealer code will always workin addition to your personal code.

*[FV06300(ALL)02/95] To program your own code:

*[FV06350(ALL)02/95] 1. Select five digits for your personal code.

[FV06400(ALL)10/93] 2. Enter the permanent code.

[FV06500(ALL)11/93] 3. Within five seconds, press the 1/2 button.

[FV06600(ALL)11/93] 4. Within five seconds of pressing the 1/2 button, enter yourpersonal code. Press each digit within five seconds of theprevious digit.

[FV06700(ALL)11/93] 5. The keyless system registers this second code. To open yourvehicle, you can now use either code. The moduleremembers only one personal code at a time. Entering asecond personal code will erase the first and replace it withthe new code.

[FV06800(ALL)10/93] 6. After you have entered your personal code, the driver’s doorwill unlock.


150

*[FV06901(ALL)02/95] To erase your personal code:

*[FV07001(ALL)02/95] 1. Enter the original permanent code.

[FV07101(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the 1/2 button within five seconds of step #1.

*[FV07201(ALL)02/95] 3. Wait six seconds.

[FV07250(ALL)11/93] 4. The keyless entry system automatically erases your personalcode. The system will now only respond to the permanentcode.

[FV07270(ALL)10/93] Do not set a code that presents the numbers in sequential order,such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0. Studies show that people whoidly press the buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,do not select a code that uses the same button five times.Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes.

%*[FV07300(ALL)01/93] Unlocking the Doors with the Keyless Entry System

[FV07401(ALL)05/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before you unlock any of theother doors. If you let more than five seconds pass betweenpressing numbers, the system shuts down and you have toenter the code again. The system has shut down if the keypadlight is out. If the keyless entry system does not work properly,use the key or Remote Entry transmitter(s) to lock and unlockthe doors or liftgate until the system can be serviced.

[FV07501(ALL)02/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the code. All codes have 5numbers. After you press the fifth number, the driver’s doorunlocks.

[FV07601(ALL)06/94] 2. To unlock the passenger’s door, sliding door and liftgate,press 3/4 within five seconds of step #1, or re-enter the codeto open the driver’s door then press 3/4.

*[FV07701(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors with the keyless entry system

*[FV07801(ALL)03/94] Along with unlocking your doors, you can use the keyless entrysystem to lock the doors.


Features

151

[FV07901(ALL)06/94] To lock all of the doors at the same time, press the 7/8 and 9/0buttons at the same time. It is not necessary to first enter thekeypad code. This will also arm your Ford anti-theft system.

%*[FV09301(ALL)08/94] Battery Saver[FV09302(ALL)06/94] When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the vehicle will turn

off battery voltage to the interior lamps after 45 minutes. (Theexterior lamps are not affected.) The purpose is to minimizeextended battery drain if the lights have inadvertently been lefton or if a door or the glove box is not completely closed.However, the timer will be immediately reset to another 45minutes if any of the following occurs:

[FV09304(ALL)11/93] ■ any door is open or closed

[FV09305(ALL)11/93] ■ the front door handle is lifted (for Illuminated Entry only)

[FV09306(ALL)11/93] ■ taking the key IN or OUT of the ignition switch

[FV09307(ALL)11/93] ■ the Keyless Entry keypad is used

[FV09308(ALL)11/93] ■ the Remote Entry transmitter is activated

%*[FV09313(ALL)02/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped)[FV09316(ALL)06/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock and

unlock the vehicle doors without using a key. The remote entrysystem also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons thatcontrol the system are located on the hand held transmitter thatcome with your vehicle.

*[FV09318(ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehiclecame with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can beordered from your dealer.

*[FV09319(ALL)02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in theOFF position.


152

[FV09323(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050158-BThe remote entry transmitter

% [FV09325(ALL)03/94] Unlocking the doors

*[FV09327(ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.

*[FV09329(ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK button a secondtime within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door.

*[FV09331(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors

*[FV09333(ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.

[FV09336(ALL)06/94] If you would like a signal that the doors have been locked,press the LOCK button again within five seconds. The doorswill lock again and the horn will beep.

%*[FV09351(ALL)02/95] Activating the remote personal alarm

[FV09361(ALL)05/95] If you wish to activate the remote personal alarm, press thePANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the tail lampsfor approximately two minutes and forty-five seconds. You canturn it OFF by pressing the PANIC button again on the sametransmitter or by turning the ignition key to the RUN position.If the alarm does not turn off, move the transmitter closer to thevehicle and press the button again.


Features

153

[FV09371(ALL)04/95] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK, or PANIC buttons,the illuminated entry system turns on the interior lights for 25seconds. You can turn these lights off with the LOCK button orby turning the ignition to the RUN position.

%*[FV09381(ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV09392(ALL)02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin typethree-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last forseveral years of normal use. If you notice a significant decreasein operating range, the batteries should be replaced.Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies,watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[FV09401(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system canalso be affected by weather conditions (such as verycold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle(buildings, other vehicles, radio towers, etc.). Typicaloperating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10meters) away from your vehicle.

[FV09411(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0050159-A

Replacing the batteries

*[FV09421(ALL)02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries bytwisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter.DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTERAPART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place thepositive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves backtogether.


154

%*[FV09431(ALL)02/95] Replacement/additional transmitters

*[FV09441(ALL)02/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, return the remainingtransmitters to your dealer for reprogramming of your remoteentry system. This is necessary to prevent further unauthorizeduse of the lost transmitter.

*[FV09451(ALL)02/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased from your dealer(remote entry system will work with up to four transmitters).Return your existing transmitters to your dealer so the remoteentry system can be reprogrammed with your new and existingtransmitters.

*[FV09461(ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCCRULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWINGTWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSEHARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUSTACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDINGINTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIREDOPERATION.

%*[FV09501(ALL)04/95] Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV09511(ALL)04/95] This system will provide illumination of the vehicle’s interiorcourtesy lamps when either outside front door handle is pulledor when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door orsound the personal alarm. The system will automatically turnoff after approximately 25 seconds or when the ignition isturned to the RUN or ACC position.

[FV09521(ALL)06/94] NOTE: The illuminated entry timer will not turn off thecourtesy lamps if they have been turned on by thedoor and or dimmer switch.

% [FV09525(ALL)05/95] Autolock

[FV09530(ALL)05/95] The Autolock feature is part of your remote entry system and isenabled at the factory. With the Autolock feature enabled, all ofthe doors will automatically lock when:

[FV09535(ALL)05/95] ■ the vehicle doors and liftgate are closed


Features

155

[FV09540(ALL)05/95] ■ the ignition key is turned to the ON position

[FV09545(ALL)05/95] ■ the brake pedal is pressed

[FV09550(ALL)05/95] ■ you shift through R (Reverse)

[FV09555(ALL)05/95] ■ the brake pedal is released

[FV09560(ALL)05/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when:

[FV09565(ALL)05/95] ■ a door is opened and then all doors and the liftgate areclosed

[FV09570(ALL)05/95] ■ the brake pedal is released

[FV09575(ALL)05/95] On vehicles with Keyless Entry, you can deactivate the systemby using the buttons for the keyless entry system if you do notwant to use the Autolock feature.

[FV09580(ALL)05/95] The doors may not lock automatically at the correct time if thedriver:

[FV09585(ALL)05/95] ■ shifts through gears without pressing the brake

[FV09590(ALL)05/95] ■ shifts through gears quickly after starting the vehicle

[FV09595(ALL)05/95] ■ releases their foot from the brake while someone has steppedout of the vehicle for a moment

[FV09600(ALL)05/95] To deactivate the Autolock system:

[FV09605(ALL)05/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code (not the usercode you may have set).

[FV09610(ALL)05/95] 2. Within five seconds, press and hold 7/8.

[FV09615(ALL)05/95] 3. Within five more seconds, press and release 3/4.

[FV09620(ALL)05/95] 4. Release 7/8.

[FV09625(ALL)05/95] To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeat the instructionsfor deactivating the system. By re-entering the code thatdeactivates the Autolock, the keyless entry system reinstates theAutolock feature.


156

% [FV09630(ALL)05/95] Anti-Theft System (if equipped)

*[FV09635(ALL)05/95] When armed, this system helps protect your vehicle againstbreak-ins or theft.

%*[FV09640(ALL)05/95] When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers andwill:

*[FV09645(ALL)05/95] ■ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and alarm indicatorlamp

*[FV09650(ALL)05/95] ■ honk the horn

*[FV09655(ALL)05/95] ■ disable the starting circuit to prevent the vehicle from beingstarted

%*[FV09660(ALL)05/95] Arming the system

*[FV09665(ALL)05/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The hood must be closedto arm the system.

*[FV09670(ALL)05/95] 2. Open any door. The alarm indicator light will start flashingto remind you to arm the system.

*[FV09675(ALL)05/95] 3. Lock the doors by using the power door lock switch. Thealarm indicator light will now glow steadily.

[FV09680(ALL)05/95] 4. Close all doors. The alarm indicator light will then remainon steadily for 30 seconds and then go out. When the lightgoes out, the system is armed.

*[FV09685(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to close all doors completely. If not, the alarmindicator light will remain on. Remember, youranti-theft system is armed only after the alarmindicator light remains on steadily for approximately30 seconds after the last door is closed, and then goesout.

*[FV09690(ALL)05/95] You can also arm the anti-theft system with the factory installedremote entry system or the keyless entry system by followingthis sequence:


Features

157

*[FV09695(ALL)05/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The hood must be closedto arm the system

*[FV09700(ALL)05/95] 2. Close all of the doors.

[FV09705(ALL)05/95] 3. Press the remote entry transmitter LOCK button or use thekeyless entry system by pressing 7/8 and 9/0 at the sametime. The alarm indicator will come on for 30 seconds toshow the alarm is arming and then turn off to show that ithas armed.

[FV09710(ALL)05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work with the factoryinstalled remote keyless entry system. It may not work withother remote entry systems.

%*[FV09715(ALL)05/95] Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system

[FV09720(ALL)05/95] You can disarm the system by unlocking either front door orthe liftgate with your door key. Turn the key all the way to theend of travel or the system will not disarm.

[FV09725(ALL)05/95] You can also disarm the system by unlocking the driver’s doorby using the UNLOCK button of the remote entry transmitter orby using the five-digit unlock code on the keyless entry systemkeypad.

*[FV09731(ALL)04/95] If the system is armed and you remain in your vehicle, simplyinsert the key into the ignition and turn it to ON. This disarmsthe system and allows you to open the door and exit withouttriggering the system.

%*[FV09791(ALL)05/95] Disarming a triggered system

*[FV09801(ALL)05/95] The alarm can be disarmed by:

*[FV09811(ALL)04/95] ■ unlocking any door with the key, or

*[FV09821(ALL)05/95] ■ using the UNLOCK button of the remote entry transmitter

[FV09825(ALL)11/93] ■ using the five-digit unlock code on the keyless entry keypad


158

[FV09831(ALL)03/94] NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn will shut offautomatically approximately two minutes and 45seconds after the system is triggered. It will triggeragain if another intrusion occurs. However, the startercircuit remains disabled until the system is disarmed.

%*[FV09901(ALL)01/93] Liftgate

*[FV09905(ALL)01/89] Liftgate opening procedure

[FV09910(ALL)11/93] 1. To open the liftgate, insert the door key into the lock andturn it clockwise. You can also unlock the latch (but notrelease it) with the power door lock system.

*[FV09915(ALL)01/89] 2. Reach under the license plate light shield and release theliftgate latch by squeezing the paddle handle rearward.

[FV09920(ALL)06/94] 3. To make the gate swing up to the fully opened position, pullback and upward on the latch paddle handle under orbehind the license plate shield.

[FV09930(ALL)12/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050108-B Opening the liftgate


Features

159

[FV09935(ALL)11/93] Make certain that you close the liftgate door before driving yourvehicle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate door liftcylinders and attaching hardware if the liftgate door is notclosed prior to driving.

[FV09940(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Make sure that the liftgate door is closed to preventexhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. Thiswill also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out.If you must drive with the liftgate door open, keep thevents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.

*[FV09950(ALL)01/89] Liftgate closing procedure

*[FV09960(ALL)01/89] 1. To make the liftgate swing downward, reach up and pull thelower edge of the liftgate (or the loop handle on the innertrim panel of vehicles with this option) and pull downward.

*[FV09970(ALL)01/89] 2. When you have pulled down the liftgate enough so that youcan reach the license plate light shield, push the shield downand forward to close the latch and liftgate. At this point, thelatch is not locked.

[FV09980(ALL)03/94] 3. You can lock the liftgate latch by pushing down thenight-lock button (located on the inside of the liftgate at thebottom of the window) before you pull down and close theliftgate. You can also lock the liftgate latch by inserting yourvehicle’s door key and turning it counterclockwise after youhave closed the liftgate, or by using the power door locks onthe front doors or the power lock switch in the cargo area.

*[FV09990(ALL)12/93] The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. Youcan open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. Itcannot be opened from inside the cargo area.


160

%*[FV10050(ALL)02/95] Windows[FV10300(ALL)10/93] Power Windows with Accessory Delay (If equipped)

[FV10400(ALL)11/93] Both of the front doors have a power control that opens andcloses the window on that door. The driver’s door has mastercontrols that operate both front door windows. You mustinitially place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position touse your power window controls. The Accessory Delay functionalso allows the power windows to be operated for up to 30seconds after the ignition key is removed or taken out of theON or ACC position. Accessory Delay will be cancelled,however, if either of the front doors are opened.

[FV10500(ALL)03/94] To open a window, press the recessed area of the switch. Toclose it, press the raised area of the switch.

*[FV10600(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Do not let children play with the power windows. Theymay seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants areclear of the window(s) before closing.

[FV10700(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050030-BThe power window switches


Features

161

[FV10800(ALL)03/94] One-Touch-Down Power Window (If equipped)

[FV10900(ALL)12/93] The one-touch-down power window feature allows you tocompletely open the driver’s window without holding down thewindow switch. To open the window completely, tap quickly onthe lower half of the switch and release it. If the top of thebutton is pressed firmly while the window is going down, thewindow will stop at that position.

*[FV11000(ALL)07/93] To open the window only partially, press the lower half of theswitch lightly and hold it until the window has opened to thedesired position and then release the switch.

*[FV11100(ALL)01/93] To close the window you must hold the upper half of thebutton until the window closes.

[FV11120(ALL)03/94] Cancelling and reactivating the one-touch-down feature

[FV11130(ALL)06/94] The one-touch-down power window feature can be cancelledand reactivated at any time using the following procedure:

[FV11140(ALL)12/93] 1. Make sure the two front doors are securely closed.

[FV11150(ALL)12/93] 2. Insert the key into the ignition and turn first to the ONposition and then back to the OFF position. Remove the keyand within 30 seconds:

[FV11160(ALL)12/93] 3. Press and hold the DOWN side of the driver’s side windowrocker switch.

[FV11170(ALL)12/93] 4. Within two seconds, put the key in the ignition.

[FV11180(ALL)12/93] 5. Hold the switch down until a long (two second) tone isheard. Release the switch while the tone is active.

[FV11190(ALL)12/93] 6. After the long tone, a confirmation sequence will be heard.One beep indicates the feature is inactive. Two beepsindicates the feature is active.

[FV11195(ALL)12/93] Repeat this procedure any time you want to cancel or reactivatethe one-touch-down power window feature.


162

*[FV11200(ALL)01/93] Manual Flip-Open Quarter Windows

[FV11300(ALL)06/94] To open the flip-open quarter windows in the third row,squeeze the upper and lower pads and pull the rear portion ofthe latch toward you. Swing the latch forward and out, thenlock it into the open position by pushing rearward until youhear a click. To close the windows, squeeze the upper andlower pads and pull the handle inward. Release pads and pushthe handle inward until you hear a click.

[FV11400(ALL)10/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050083-A Manual flip-open quarter window latch location

*[FV11600(ALL)09/93] Power Quarter Windows (If equipped)

[FV11701(ALL)03/94] The power rear quarter vent windows operate with the ignitionin the ON or ACC positions. The vent windows are controlledby the right and left switches located in the center of theinstrument panel, just to the right of the rear defogger. Press theindented side of the switch to open the windows; press theraised side of the switch to close the windows.


Features

163

[FV11800(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050034-AThe power quarter window switches

%*[FV13000(ALL)01/95] Seats

*[FV13100(ALL)01/95] Adjusting the Seats

[FV13150(ALL)03/94] Adjusting the front seats manually

*[FV13200(ALL)04/95] To move the front seats forward or backward:

[FV13300(ALL)09/93] 1. Find the adjustment bar at the lower cushion of the frontseat.

[FV13400(ALL)10/93] 2. Pull the bar up to unlatch the seat.

*[FV13500(ALL)04/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.

[FV13600(ALL)10/93] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new position. Makesure the seat locks securely in place.


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when thevehicle is moving.


164

*[FV14000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoidinjuring people in a collision or sudden stop.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, alwaysdrive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.



[FV14075(ALL)02/96] Tip Slide Seat (If equipped)

[FV14085(ALL)02/96] This feature allows convenient access into the second row seatsthrough the driver’s door.

[FV14090(ALL)02/96] To operate the tip slide seat:

[FV14095(ALL)02/96] 1. Lift the tip slide release lever located at the base of thedriver’s seatback. The seatback tilts forward and the tip slideseat latch mechanism is released.


Features

165

[FV14100(ALL)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050291-A


166

[FV14105(ALL)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050295-A

[FV14110(ALL)02/96] 2. Push on the seatback to move the seat assembly forward.This provides access to the second row for loading andunloading groceries, briefcases, passengers, etc. through thedriver’s door.

[FV14115(ALL)02/96] To return the driver seat to its previous position and seat angle:

[FV14120(ALL)02/96] 1. Push the seatback to move the seat assembly rearward, untilthe pedestal stops.


Features

167

[FV14125(ALL)02/96]

7-1/2 pica art:0050292-A

[FV14130(ALL)02/96] 2. Continue pushing to return the seatback to its previouslylocked position.

[FV14135(ALL)02/96] NOTE: When returning the seatback to its original position,you may experience a slight hesitation. If so, stoppushing the seatback momentarily, then resume. Theseatback will only return to its original position afterthe seat is safely latched.

[FV14140(ALL)02/96] Your Windstar tip slide seat has been equipped with a lock-outsafety feature which prevents the seatback from returning to itsoriginal position until the seat pedestal latches in the tracks. Ifthe seat has not latched check under the seat and in the reartracks for possible obstructions.

[FV14145(ALL)02/96] RWARNING

DO NOT DRIVE THE VEHICLE WITH THE TIP SLIDESEAT UNLATCHED.

[FV14150(ALL)02/96] To move the seat forward or backward:

[FV14155(ALL)02/96] 1. Find the adjustment bar underneath the front part of theseat.

[FV14160(ALL)02/96] 2. Lift the bar to unlatch the seat.


168

[FV14165(ALL)02/96]

7-1/2 pica art:0050293-A

[FV14170(ALL)02/96] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.

[FV14175(ALL)02/96] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new position. Makesure the seat locks securely in place.

[FV14180(ALL)02/96] To recline the seat:

[FV14185(ALL)02/96] 1. Lift the seatback recliner lever located on the side of thedriver’s seat cushion.

[FV14188(ALL)02/96]

7-1/2 pica art:0050294-A

[FV14190(ALL)02/96] 2. While holding the recliner lever up, adjust the seatback tothe position you want. You can tilt the seat back or bring itforward.

[FV14195(ALL)02/96] 3. Release the handle to lock the seat in its new position.


Features

169




To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, alwaysdrive and ride with your seatback in an upright positionwith the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

%[FV14220(ALL)04/94] Using the power seats (if equipped)

[FV14240(ALL)11/93] If your vehicle has the power seat option, you can adjust it inseveral directions. The controls are on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat.

[FV14260(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050103-AThe power controls on the driver’s seat


170

% [FV14270(ALL)03/94] Power lumbar support, driver/passenger seat(If equipped)

[FV14275(ALL)12/93] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, you can inflate alumbar support pad in the seat back. To inflate the lumbar pad,push the raised side of the rocker switch. To deflate, push therecessed side of the switch.

[FV14280(ALL)04/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050102-AThe power lumbar switch on the passenger seat

[FV14300(ALL)11/93] Reclining Bucket Seats

[FV14400(ALL)03/94] Your vehicle is equipped with reclining front bucket seats andmay have optional reclining second row buckets. To reclineyour seat:

[FV14500(ALL)04/95] 1. On the left sides (front seats) or window seat sides (secondrow buckets) of the seats, find the handle for the recliner.

*[FV14600(ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.


Features

171

*[FV14700(ALL)01/89] 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust it to the positionyou want.

*[FV14800(ALL)08/94] 4. Release the handle to lock the seatback in position.

*[FV14900(ALL)08/94] 5. To return the seatback to upright position, lift the handleand lean forward. Then release the handle.

[FV14910(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050165-BReclining bucket seat

% [FV14920(ALL)10/93] Adjusting the Head Restraints (LX Only)

[FV14930(ALL)11/93] Your vehicle’s bucket seats are equipped with head restraintswhich are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these restraints isto limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.

[FV14940(ALL)11/93] To adjust the head restraints up, simply pull up on them. Toadjust them back downward, push down. The head restraintswill remain stationary in whatever position they are placed.


172

[FV14946(ALL)06/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0050172-A

Head restraint adjustment

[FV14951(ALL)06/94] NOTE: On GL models, front bucket seats are designed withintegral headrests.

[FV14960(ALL)06/94] E-Z access operation — passenger side optionalsecond row bucket seats

[FV14965(ALL)03/94] To provide easy access to the rear of the vehicle, the passengerside second row bucket seatback can be tilted forward.

*[FV14970(ALL)11/93] To tilt seat forward:

*[FV14975(ALL)11/93] 1. Put the seatback in the upright position.

[FV14980(ALL)11/93] 2. Lift upward on the handle on the right (outboard) side ofthe seat (also the recliner release handle).

*[FV14985(ALL)11/93] 3. The seat can now be tilted forward.

*[FV14990(ALL)11/93] To latch the seat in its normal position, push seatback rearwarduntil it is latched in position.

[FV15020(ALL)11/93] Adjustable Three Passenger Bench Seat (If equipped)[FV15040(ALL)12/93] Your vehicle’s third row passenger bench seat may be adjustable

forward and backward. This adjustment allows for additionalcargo space with the seat adjusted to the full forward positionand extra leg room when adjusted rearward.

[FV15060(ALL)04/95] Rotate the release handle upward to unlatch. The release handleis located on the right side of the seat near the floor. Adjust tothe desired seat position and release the handle. Make certainthe seat is latched and secure.


Features

173

[FV15100(ALL)05/95] Seat/Bed Conversion (If equipped)

[FV15120(ALL)02/95] 2nd Row Seat

[FV15140(ALL)02/95] To convert the seat to a bed:[FV15160(ALL)02/95] 1. Unlatch the seat/bed lever, located on the right-hand side of

the seat cushion by pushing down.[FV15180(ALL)02/95] 2. Push the seatback down and rearward by applying pressure

at the top of the seatback until it latches.[FV15200(ALL)02/95] The seat cushion will move forward when going from the seat

to the bed position.

[FV15220(ALL)02/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050260-A2nd row seat (seat position)

[FV15240(ALL)02/95] To convert the bed to a seat:

[FV15260(ALL)02/95] 1. While in front of the seat, pull the release lever up, slightlyraise the seatback, then push the seat bottom rearward untilthe seatback is in the full upright and locked position.


174

[FV15280(ALL)02/95] 2. Make sure the safety belts are free and available for use.


The seat/bed should not be occupied while the vehicle ismoving unless it is in the upright, fully-latched position.

[FV15320(ALL)02/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050262-A 2nd row seat (bed position)

[FV15340(ALL)02/95] 3rd row seat

[FV15360(ALL)02/95] To convert the seat to a bed:

[FV15380(ALL)02/95] 1. From the rear of the vehicle, pull down on the release leverlocated on the right-hand side of the seat, and at the sametime pull the seatback rearward.

[FV15400(ALL)02/95] 2. Push down at the top of the seatback until it latches.


Features

175

[FV15420(ALL)02/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050261-A3rd row seat (seat position)

[FV15440(ALL)02/95] To convert the bed to a seat:

[FV15460(ALL)02/95] 1. From the rear of the vehicle, pull the release lever down andat the same time lift the seatback up. Raise the seatback tothe full upright and locked position.

[FV15480(ALL)02/95] 2. Make sure the safety belts are free and available for use.


The seat/bed should not be occupied while the vehicle ismoving unless it is in the upright, fully-latched position.


176

[FV15520(ALL)02/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050263-A 3rd row seat (bed position)

[FV15750(ALL)11/93] Removing the Seats

[FV15800(ALL)06/94] Quick release second row bucket seats (If equipped)

[FV15900(ALL)03/94] To remove the second row bucket seats:

[FV16020(ALL)11/93] 1. Lift the seat latch handles (located at the rear of the seatnear the floor) up and rearward, causing the latch hooks todisengage from the rear floor attachments.

[FV16040(ALL)03/94] 2. While lifting the handles, lift the seat at the rear and rotateentire seat assembly forward, pivoting on the front floorattachments. When seat latches are clear of floor attachments,release the latch handles.

[FV16060(ALL)11/93] 3. Pull the seat rearward to disengage it from the front floorpins.


Features

177

[FV16300(ALL)03/94] To install the second row bucket seats:

[FV16400(ALL)11/93] 1. Lift the seat assemblies into the vehicle.

[FV16500(ALL)11/93] 2. Locate front hooks on front pins and drop rear hooks overrear pins with enough force to cause the hooks at the rear toengage and hook on to the pins in the floor wells.

[FV16601(ALL)11/93] 3. Ensure that the latch handles are fully seated in the downposition.


Check to see that the seat is latched securely in position.Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent properseat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat latchwhile the vehicle is in motion.

[FV16900(ALL)12/93] Two and Three Passenger Bench Seat Assemblies

[FV17000(ALL)11/93] NOTE: It is easiest to remove/reinstall both the second andthird row bench seats through the sliding door. Also,remove any floor mats (if equipped) in the rearseating compartments before seat removal.

*[FV17100(ALL)03/91] To remove seat assembly:

[FV17780(ALL)08/94] 1. (For second row bench seat only) Disengage the tongueportion of the lap/shoulder belt from the detachable anchorassembly by inserting a key or small screwdriver into theslot provided on the detachable anchor (see Figure 1). Whenthis shoulder belt assembly is free of the seat, allow theretractor to wind up the slack in the belt.


178

[FV17785(ALL)04/95]

27-1/2 pica art:0050169-F

Figure 1: Second row detachable anchor — detached position

[FV17790(ALL)11/93] 2. Using the clip attached to the end of the shoulder belt, clipthe end of the belt to the stationary portion of the shoulderbelt (see Figure 2). The end of the shoulder belt must beclipped in order to keep it from striking anything duringvehicle operation.


Features

179

[FV17795(ALL)06/94]

24 pica art:0050170-D

Figure 2: Securing the detachable shoulder belt

[FV17798(ALL)10/93] Refer to Figure 3 for steps 3-6.

[FV17800(ALL)03/94] 3. Release the seatback by pulling the lever located at the backof the seat on the right hand side. Fold the seatback forwardand latch it in the down position (except for bench seatequipped with built-in child safety seat).


180

[FV17900(ALL)03/94] 4. Locate the seat latch handles at the rear of the seat near thefloor. For the second row bench seat, lift the latch handlesup and rearward. For the third row bench seat, just lift thelatch handles. The latch hooks will disengage from the rearfloor attachments.

[FV18000(ALL)12/93] 5. While still lifting the handles, lift seat at rear and rotateentire seat assembly forward, pivoting on the front floorattachments. When the rear seat latches are clear of floorattachments, release the latch handles.

[FV18100(ALL)10/93] 6. Pull the seat rearward to disengage it from the front floorpins.

[FV18150(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050171-AFigure 3: Removal and installation of the second and third bench seats


Features

181

*[FV18200(ALL)05/89] Be careful that the latches are not damaged when the seats arestored.

*[FV18300(ALL)05/89] To install the seat assembly:

*[FV18400(ALL)10/90] 1. Clear the area of debris around the seat floor attachments.

[FV18500(ALL)03/94] 2. With the seatback in a folded and latched position (exceptfor bench seats equipped with built-in child safety seat),place the seat assembly in your vehicle. Tip the seatassembly forward and engage the front seat hooks onto theforward attachment pins in the floor wells.

*[FV18600(ALL)10/90] 3. Rotate the seat downward and engage the latch into the rearfloor attachment. Lifting of the latch handles is not requiredfor installation.

*[FV18700(ALL)10/90] 4. Ensure that the latch handles are fully seated in the downposition.

[FV18800(ALL)12/93] 5. (Second row bench seat only) Before you engage the safetybelt, be sure it is not twisted. A twisted safety belt maycause the retractor to not work properly. Remove any twist,then insert the tongue end of the safety belt into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “snap” and feel the latchengage.

[FV18820(ALL)03/94] 6. To raise the seatback, pull up on the seatback latch handle.A slight downward pressure on the seatback (bench seatonly) will reduce effort on the latch. Rotate the seatbackupward until the latch re-engages.


When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must beplaced in its original position. Improper installation ofthe seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts andcould increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warninglabel on the seat belt.


182

[FV18860(ALL)11/93] Whenever the second row bench seat is installed in the vehicleand no one is using the outboard seating position (nearest thesliding door), the lap/shoulder safety belt must be properlystowed.

*[FV18870(ALL)11/93] The second row passenger side outboard seating position uses ahook above the sliding/cargo door to stow the shoulder safetybelt when entering or exiting the vehicle or when it is not beingused.

[FV18875(ALL)12/93] NOTE: When the belt is stowed using the hook, DO NOT usethe hanging belt as an assist when entering thevehicle.


Features

183

[FV18880(ALL)05/95]

27-1/2 pica

art:0050212-DProper stowage of shoulder safety belt

[FV18900(ALL)03/94] The two passenger bench seat must be installed in the first rowbehind the front seats.


184




Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether theseat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat maycause injury during a sudden stop.


Before using the seat, make sure that the latch hooks aresecurely locked around the floor pins.

%*[FV19700(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV19800(ALL)05/95] Leather and vinyl

[FV19900(ALL)04/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth.For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leathercleaner of a mild soap.

%*[FV20000(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV20100(ALL)04/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuumcleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directionsthat come with the cleaner.

*[FV20200(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hiddenarea of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture isadversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not useit.


Features

185

%*[FV21270(ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments

*[FV21280(ALL)09/93] Underseat Storage Compartment (If equipped)

[FV21300(ALL)10/93] The underseat storage compartment is located underneath thefront passenger seat. It can be opened by pulling up and towardthe instrument panel.

[FV21400(ALL)09/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050042-AThe underseat storage compartment

[FV21800(ALL)11/93] Compact Disc and Cassette Storage Console(If equipped)

[FV21900(ALL)08/94] A storage compartment is included below the radio for storageof your discs or cassettes. There is also a compact disc andcassette storage insert in the storage compartment located underthe front passenger seat (if equipped).


186

[FV30000(ALL)09/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050014-A Compact disc/cassette storage

% [FV30120(ALL)12/93] Console (If equipped)

[FV30140(ALL)03/94] Your vehicle may have a full console. Console features aredetailed in the following illustration. To open the console lid,lift up on the latch toward the rear of the console. If yourvehicle has the CD changer (a dealer installed option), thisconsole could also house the changer and conceal it from sight.


Features

187

[FV30160(ALL)12/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050015-BThe full console

% [FV30200(ALL)03/94] Cupholders

[FV30300(ALL)11/93] The front seat cupholders are located with the ashtray. To accessthe cupholders, pull open the ashtray drawer which is locatedto the right of the steering column, above the compact disc andcassette storage console.

[FV30400(ALL)03/94] As you close the ashtray drawer, the cupholders willautomatically fold back into place.


188

[FV30500(ALL)08/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050010-A The front seat cupholders

[FV30800(ALL)06/94] Your vehicle also has rear seat cupholders built into the sidepanels.

*[FV30850(ALL)06/94] NOTE: Do not place heavy objects in the cupholders.

%*[FV31000(ALL)01/95] Mirrors


Make sure you can see clearly through the rearviewmirror at all times. Do not allow anything to block yourvision. If you can’t see through the mirror, you could beinvolved in an accident and injure yourself or others.

%*[FV31600(ALL)01/93] Side View Mirrors

*[FV31700(ALL)01/93] Close your door and adjust the driver’s seat to the mostcomfortable position before you adjust the side view mirrors.

[FV31800(ALL)11/93] If you have manually adjusting side view mirrors, you canadjust them in any direction by moving the mirror glass. Themirror heads should be folded rearward to prevent damagewhen using an automatic car wash.


Features

189

*[FV31900(ALL)12/93] NOTE: Be careful. The convex side view mirror on the rightmakes objects appear smaller and farther away thanthey actually are. Use the inside rearview mirror (orlook behind you) to determine the actual size anddistance of objects that appear in the convex mirror.

%*[FV32000(ALL)09/93] Dual Electric Remote Controlled Mirrors (If equipped)

[FV32100(ALL)10/93] If you have power side view mirrors, you can adjust them inany direction by using the mirror controls on the door panel.

[FV32150(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050031-AThe electric mirror controls

*[FV32200(ALL)08/91] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:

[FV32300(ALL)08/93] 1. Select the right or left mirror by sliding the selector levertowards the right arrow or the left arrow.

*[FV32400(ALL)01/93] 2. Move the control knob in the direction you want to movethe mirror.

[FV32500(ALL)08/93] 3. Return the selector lever to the middle position to keep themirror in place.


190

[FV32550(ALL)12/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0050214-A

Operating the electric mirrors

% [FV32620(ALL)10/93] Heated Side View Mirrors (If equipped)

[FV32640(ALL)11/93] The heated side view mirrors are automatically activatedwhenever you activate the rear defogger. The defogger in yourvehicle automatically shuts off after 10 minutes. If additionaldefogging is necessary, reactivate the rear defogger.

%*[FV32700(ALL)01/95] Automatic Dimming Inside Rearview Mirror(If equipped)

[FV32800(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050191-AThe automatic non-glare mirror

*[FV32900(ALL)01/95] The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normalstate to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach themirror. This mirror functions at night, and has a limitedfunction at dusk or dawn. From the non-glare state, the mirror


Features

191

will return to the normal state after a short delay. The delaystarts when the glare goes away. The delay prevents excessivechanging of the mirror as traffic moves behind and around thevehicle, or on rolling hills and curves.

*[FV33000(ALL)01/95] The electronic mirror measures the brightness of the lightcoming in from the rear of the vehicle. It automatically makes acorrection in the glare state. The mirror may be turned off ineither the normal or non-glare position.

*[FV33100(ALL)06/94] There are two light sensors (photocells) in this mirror. Thesensor that detects rear glare is located inside a window in theupper RH corner of the mirror. The second light sensor whichdetermines outside light level is located on the backside of themirror case.

*[FV33200(ALL)01/95] One important safety feature is that the mirror automaticallyreturns to the normal position whenever the vehicle is placed inR (Reverse) (when the mirror is in the ON position). Thisfeature ensures a bright clear view in the mirror when backingup.

*[FV33400(ALL)03/95] To turn on the automatic mirror, have the key in the ONposition and push the ON button once. The light in the centerof the button will light indicating the mirror is on. To turn themirror off push the ON button again.

*[FV33500(ALL)05/93] The mirror can be temporarily darkened, if wanted, by pushingthe Dim button. After releasing the button, the mirror willreturn to the previous operation mode after a short delay.

% [FV33600(ALL)09/93] Illuminated Courtesy Mirror (If equipped)

[FV33700(ALL)01/93] Your vehicle may have illuminated courtesy mirrors on the sunvisors. You can turn on the lighted mirrors by lifting the mirrordoor cover.


192

[FV33800(ALL)09/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0040111-B The illuminated mirror on the sun visor

%*[FV34400(ALL)09/93] Cargo Net (If equipped)

*[FV34500(ALL)01/93] The cargo net is designed to hold your cargo upright betweenthe third row bench seat and the liftgate to prevent it frommoving around the cargo area.

*[FV34600(ALL)01/93] To install the cargo net:

*[FV34700(ALL)01/93] Attach the loops on the four corners of the net to the fourretainers on the cargo area rear quarter panels. Pull on the netto be sure that it is fastened securely.


Be sure to secure all four loops into the retainers. Thecargo restrained in the net must not exceed 50 lbs.(22.5 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

*[FV34900(ALL)01/93] To remove the cargo net, remove the loops from the fourretainers.


Features

193

[FV35000(ALL)09/93]

24 pica art:0050013-A

The rear cargo net

%*[FV35100(ALL)09/93] Four Season Roof Rack (If equipped)[FV35200(ALL)08/94] Always load your luggage as far back as it will safely go on the

four season roof rack. Do not load more than 165 pounds(75 kg) on the roof rack structure or 100 pounds (45 kg) on theroof panel slats. Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are


194

located on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (located onthe driver’s door pillar).

[FV35300(ALL)10/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0050109-A

The four season roof rack

[FV35400(ALL)11/93] The rear cross-bar can be adjusted forward and backward. Placeyour luggage between the bars, adjust the rear bar, and securethe luggage with rope to the bars. Items carried on the roofrack must be properly secured before driving your vehicle.

[FV35500(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050032-BThe adjustable cross-bar


195

Electronic

Sound

System

s

[AS

01100(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

67

4-B

The

Com

pactD

iscR

adio

File:wnass.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:19:39 1996

196

%*[AS01175(ALL)04/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS01250(ALL)05/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic Stereo Radiowith the Ford Compact Disc Player.

*[AS01300(ALL)04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD Player

*[AS01400(ALL)04/92] Most of the features of this unit work for both radio and CDoperation, depending on which mode the unit is in. Also, someof the buttons control several different functions, so be sure toread all of the operating instructions carefully.

*[AS01500(ALL)04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS01600(ALL)04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it againto turn it off.

*[AS01625(ALL)04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS01650(ALL)05/95] Press the (+/–) side of the “VOL” button to increase/decreasethe volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relativevolume level.

*[AS01675(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off (with the “POWER”button), the volume will remain in the position it wasset at when radio power is switched back on.

*[AS01700(ALL)04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS01800(ALL)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than oncewill alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons described under How totune radio stations.

File:wnass.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:19:39 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

197

%*[AS01900(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS02000(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE”button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select thestation by using the memory buttons, which you can set to anydesired frequency. These four methods are described below.

*[AS02100(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually tune

*[AS02200(ALL)04/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time (FM changes in increments of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE”button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — withinapproximately five seconds — pressing and releasing eitherthe top a or bottom b half of the “SEEK” button. Tochange frequencies quickly, press and hold down either thetop or bottom half of the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show a blinking “M”.

*[AS02300(ALL)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS02400(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS02500(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press thetop a half of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenablestation up the frequency band. Press the bottom b half ofthe button to select the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding the button,listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desiredstation.


198

*[AS02600(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan radio stations

*[AS02700(ALL)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scanmode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the top a halfof the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds. Pushing the bottom b half ofthe “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down thefrequency band, again stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds.

*[AS02800(ALL)04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled stationpress the “SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS03000(ALL)01/95] ■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons%*[AS03100(ALL)04/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons.

These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AMstations and 10 FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Followthe easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies.

*[AS03200(ALL)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS03400(ALL)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button untilthe sound returns. That station is now held in memory onthat button.

*[AS03500(ALL)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory presetbutton you want to set.

[AS03600(ALL)04/92] Using the Automatic Memory Load and AutomaticMemory Store features

[AS03700(ALL)10/94] NOTE: If no stations are in memory presets, you can activatethe feature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately three seconds.Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM,FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the firstfive strong stations for the respective band and storingthem in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FM band.)



199

*[AS03800(ALL)05/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strongstations into your memory buttons without losing yourexisting memory presets, which is especially handy whiletraveling. Your radio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have tocontinually manually tune to existing stations.

[AS03900(ALL)10/94] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTOPRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first fivestrong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2)into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”,then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily onthe stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and this display will show“AUTO” each time a preset is activated.

*[AS04000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in thefrequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons willstore the last strong station detected on the band.

*[AS04100(ALL)05/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will beginplaying the station stored on memory button 1.

[AS04200(ALL)04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return tothe manually-set memory button stations (or those stationsset using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTOPRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band,the radio will store the next set of five strong stations.

*[AS04400(ALL)04/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust the tone balanceand speaker output

*[AS04500(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS04600(ALL)04/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increasebass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass(less “lows”).


200

*[AS04700(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS04800(ALL)04/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increasetreble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS05100(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS05200(ALL)04/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the“+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the leftspeakers.

*[AS05300(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS05400(ALL)04/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the“+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rearspeakers.

[AS05500(ALL)11/93] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels ofbass and treble and positions of speaker balance andfader functions for five seconds after adjustments aremade, then revert to volume level set.

%*[AS05600(ALL)04/95] Clock operation

*[AS05700(ALL)04/95] When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK” button to switchfrom radio frequency to clock. Only the clock numerals will bedisplayed in the clock mode — there is no A.M./P.M.indication. When in the clock mode, the time will be displayeduntil the button is pushed again. However, if you retune theradio while it is in the clock mode, the new radio frequencywill be displayed for approximately ten seconds and thenchange back to clock.



201

*[AS05800(ALL)04/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK” button to changethe display from elapsed time mode to track number mode toclock mode. If the CD track selection is changed when you arein the clock or elapsed time mode, the new track number willbe displayed for approximately ten seconds and then revertback to the previous mode.

*[AS05900(ALL)04/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the “CLOCK” button andeither the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to set hours,or the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes.

*[AS06000(ALL)05/94] NOTE: The clock can be set with the radio and/or ignition onor off.

%*[AS07000(ALL)04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Compact Disc Player

*[AS07100(ALL)04/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable of playing 12cm or 8 cm discs, without an adapter! The Player operates whenthe power is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handlethe disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of thecare and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of andClean Your CD Player and Discs.

[AS07200(ALL)11/93] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is ejected and“ERROR” begins scrolling in the display, remove thedisc and reinsert it right side up (label side up).

*[AS07300(ALL)04/95] The digital display on your CD player will either show thetrack (selection) number or the elapsed time. (The display modecan be selected by pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators forplay (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”) are also in thedisplay. (These features are described later.)

*[AS07400(ALL)04/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will overridethat of the radio.

[AS07500(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controlson the radio are also used with the CD player. Referto earlier operating instructions on these controls.


202

*[AS07600(ALL)04/95] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS07700(ALL)04/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. Wheninserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and playstarts at the beginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS07800(ALL)04/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automaticallyreturns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing.

*[AS07900(ALL)11/93] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured toprevent the accidental insertion of a second disc.

[AS08000(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protectthe laser diode. If the temperature of the playerreaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit willshut off the player and “TOO HOT” will scroll in thedisplay for five seconds (radio will resume playing).When the temperature returns to normal operatingrange, the CD player will again be operational.

*[AS08100(ALL)04/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

*[AS08200(ALL)04/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the playmode and the play indicator a illuminates. To stoptemporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM”button. The stop indicator X in the display illuminates andoperation returns to the radio mode. To resume CD play, pressthe “PLAY/STOP” button once again.

*[AS08300(ALL)11/93] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play andthen is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, theCD player will resume playing in the mode it was inwhen ignition was turned off.



203

*[AS08400(ALL)05/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CD player

*[AS08500(ALL)05/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the“FF” button (to fast forward) or the “REV” button (to reverse).While either button is pressed, the disc goes forward orbackward at two different speeds depending on how long thebutton is held down. (Pressing either button for more thanapproximately three seconds will speed up the process.) Releasethe button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsedplaying time in the display or by listening to the sound duringfast forward or reverse). When you have reached the beginningof track 1, the CD player will begin playing.

*[AS08600(ALL)04/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fastforward button pressed, the display will show “END” and theplayer will go into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP” buttonto begin playing the first track of the disc, press the “REV”button to back up from the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK”function to locate a desired track.

*[AS08610(ALL)04/95] Using the “SEEK” feature

[AS08620(ALL)10/94] Press the top (a) of the “SEEK” button once to repeat thecurrent playing selection. Press the bottom (b) of the “SEEK”button to advance to the next selection.

[AS08630(ALL)10/94] Pressing and holding the top (a) or bottom (b) of the “SEEK”button will scroll backward and forward respectively throughthe tracks.

*[AS08700(ALL)04/95] Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS08800(ALL)04/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode. Oncein the scan mode, press the top (a) or bottom (b) half of the“SEEK” button to scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenabletrack for approximately eight seconds. This continues until youpress the “SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While in thescan mode, the display shows the current sampled tracknumber.


204

*[AS08900(ALL)04/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS09000(ALL)04/95] ■ Compression

*[AS09100(ALL)04/95] The compression feature will bring soft and loud passagescloser together for a more consistent listening level.

[AS09200(ALL)02/95] To turn the compression on, press the “COMP” button.When on, the compression indicator (“C”) will appear in thedisplay. Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS09300(ALL)04/95] ■ Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS09400(ALL)04/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player but is not removedfrom the disc opening within approximately 10 seconds, theplayer will automatically reload the disc for storage, unlessthe disc is automatically ejected due to a “focus error” (discinserted upside down). In this case, the disc will not beautomatically reloaded.

*[AS09500(ALL)04/95] How to eject the disc

*[AS09600(ALL)04/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the disc and resumeradio operation of your audio system.

[AS09700(ALL)11/93] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio power and/orignition is on or off.

%*[AS09710(ALL)04/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player andDiscs

*[AS09720(ALL)04/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford CompactDisc Player, carefully read the following precautions:

*[AS09730(ALL)04/95] ■ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never touch the playingsurface.

*[AS09740(ALL)04/95] ■ Before playing, inspect the disc for any contamination. Ifneeded, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such asthe DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3HCompact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to theedges. Do not use a circular motion to clean.



205

*[AS09750(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner,commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intendedfor analog records.

*[AS09760(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sourcessuch as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave anydiscs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be aconsiderable rise in temperature or damage may result.

*[AS09765(ALL)04/95] ■ After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS09770(ALL)04/95] ■ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try to insertanother disc. Doing so may damage the disc player.

*[AS09780(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc player.

*[AS09790(ALL)04/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this productwill increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compactdisc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt todisassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

*[AS09800(ALL)04/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player

*[AS09810(ALL)04/95] The following information is designed to help you recognizetypical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted asmechanical malfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS09820(ALL)04/95] ■ A disc is already loaded.

*[AS09830(ALL)04/95] ■ The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.

*[AS09840(ALL)04/95] ■ The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS09850(ALL)05/95] ■ The player’s internal temperature is above 167˚F (75˚C).Allow the player to cool off before operating.

*[AS09869(ALL)04/95] ■ Different manufacturers of compact discs may produce discswith different dimensions or tolerances, some of which maynot be within industry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dustand scratches could be defective and may not play on yourFord Compact Disc Player.


206

*[AS09870(ALL)04/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed:

*[AS09880(ALL)04/95] ■ The radio is not on.

*[AS09890(ALL)04/95] ■ The unit is in the stop mode.

*[AS09900(ALL)06/95] ■ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit.If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately anhour until the moisture evaporates.

*[AS09910(ALL)04/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS09920(ALL)04/95] ■ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will causethe sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc playeror scratch the discs.


Electronic

Sound

System

s207

[AS

09925(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

67

5-B

High-L

evelA

udioSystem

File:wnass.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:19:39 1996

208

%*[AS09930(ALL)03/95] High-Level Audio System[AS09940(ALL)07/91] Ford’s High-Level Audio System delivers quality performance

for maximum listening enjoyment.

*[AS09950(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS09960(ALL)04/95] How to turn the radio on and off



*[AS10000(ALL)05/95] Press the (+/–) side of the “VOL” button to increase/decreasethe volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relativevolume level.



*[AS10030(ALL)07/92] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than oncewill alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons described under How toTune Radio Stations.



209

%*[AS10040(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS10050(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE”button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select thestation by using the memory buttons, which you can set to anydesired frequency. These four methods are described below.

*[AS10060(ALL)05/95] ■ Using the “TUNE” function

*[AS10070(ALL)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time (FM changes in increments of 200 kHz; AM changesin increments of 10 kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then— within approximately five seconds — pressing andreleasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold downeither the right or left side of the “SEEK” button.



*[AS10100(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)side of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By holding the button down, listenablestations can be passed over to reach the desired station.


210

*[AS10120(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS10130(ALL)03/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scanmode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the right (a)side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately a five-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode downthe frequency band, again stopping on each listenable stationfor approximately a five-second sampling.

*[AS10150(ALL)04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled stationpress the “SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS10160(ALL)01/95] ■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons

*[AS10170(ALL)05/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AMstations and 10 preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2).

*[AS10180(ALL)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies:






211

*[AS10240(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

[AS10250(ALL)10/94] NOTE: If no stations are in memory presets, you can activatethe feature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately three seconds.Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM,FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the firstfive strong stations for the respective band and storingthem in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FM band.)

*[AS10260(ALL)05/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strongstations into your memory buttons without losing yourexisting memory presets, which is especially handy whiletraveling. Your radio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have tocontinually manually tune to existing stations.

[AS10270(ALL)07/92] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTOPRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first fivestrong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2)into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”,then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily onthe stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode for the selected band and thisdisplay will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated.

*[AS10280(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in thefrequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons willstore the last strong station detected on the band.

*[AS10290(ALL)05/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will beginplaying the station stored on memory button 1.


212

[AS10300(ALL)04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return tothe manually-set memory button stations (or those stationsset using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTOPRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band,the radio will store the next set of five strong stations.

*[AS10310(ALL)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of yourradio


*[AS10330(ALL)04/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increasebass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass(less “lows”).


*[AS10350(ALL)04/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increasetreble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).


*[AS10370(ALL)04/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the“+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the leftspeakers.


*[AS10390(ALL)04/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the“+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rearspeakers.



213


%*[AS10450(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player

*[AS10460(ALL)02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS10470(ALL)02/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Onceyou insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to theright), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of theway in and play will begin after a momentary tape tighteningprocess. Display indicates “M” (for metal/CrO

2) while tape is

playing.

*[AS10500(ALL)02/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on thetape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN”function. Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS10510(ALL)02/95] ■ Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS10520(ALL)05/94] To fast foward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radiowill automatically begin playing until fast forward ismanually stopped. At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape.

*[AS10530(ALL)02/95] ■ Rewinding the tape

*[AS10540(ALL)07/92] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.

[AS10550(ALL)12/93] ■ How to change the track of the tape being played

*[AS10560(ALL)07/92] The alternate track of the tape can be selected anytime bypressing the “PLAY/PROG” button.

*[AS10570(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS10580(ALL)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on thetape. Push the left (b) side to seek the previous tapeselection.


214

*[AS10590(ALL)11/93] NOTE: If you want to restart a currently playing tapeselection, press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” buttonafter three seconds into the current selection.

*[AS10595(ALL)03/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l) indicate the directionof tape travel.

*[AS10600(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS10700(ALL)03/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode(display indicates “SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button will begin the forward scan mode on the tapecurrently playing, stopping on each tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling.

*[AS10800(ALL)03/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button will beginthe reverse scan mode, stopping on each previous tapeselection for approximately an eight-second sampling. Whilescanning, the display indicates whirling sprockets plus an“S” (m).

*[AS10810(ALL)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tapeselection press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS10820(ALL)02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS10830(ALL)04/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJCT” button.The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. Thetape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition)on or off.

*[AS10840(ALL)01/95] How to store the tape

*[AS10850(ALL)03/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resumeradio play. The cassette will be stored in the tape player andthe X symbol in the display will be lit until you push the“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fast forward andfast rewind can be used while the tape is in storage modewithout interrupting radio play.



215

*[AS10860(ALL)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

[AS10870(ALL)07/93] DolbyH is a Registered Trademark of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corp.

*[AS10880(ALL)05/95] Push the k button to activate. When on, the k symbolabove the button will be lit.

*[AS10905(ALL)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes

*[AS10910(ALL)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way itwas meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:

*[AS10915(ALL)02/95] ■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tapeplayer head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tape operation.

*[AS10920(ALL)02/95] ■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should beused. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subjectto breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS10925(ALL)02/95] ■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, highhumidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed toextreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS10930(ALL)02/95] ■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playingby putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes andturning the hub until the tape is tight.

*[AS10935(ALL)02/95] ■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in themechanism. Remove any loose label material before insertinga cassette.

*[AS10940(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not inuse. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.


216

*[AS11010(ALL)01/95] Tape error messages

*[AS11020(ALL)01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certainproblems you may experience. Error codes are as follows:

*[AS11030(ALL)02/95] Error 0 — Communication error between the radio controllerand the tape controller. The cassette player will eject the tape.Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears, turn theignition off, then back on again and insert the tape.

*[AS11040(ALL)02/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. The cassette tape playerwill eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error codeappears in the display, try a different cartridge.

*[AS11050(ALL)02/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Your cassette tape playerwill go into the pause mode. Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. Ifthe tape doesn’t eject, refer the problem to qualified personnelfor service.

%*[AS11060(ALL)03/95] Clock Operation

*[AS11080(ALL)07/90] How to view the clock mode

*[AS11090(ALL)07/93] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and timein the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio functionwill automatically display the radio frequency for approximatelyten seconds before changing back to the clock mode.

*[AS11100(ALL)07/90] How to set the clock

[AS11120(ALL)12/93] Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button, press the “SEEK”button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) to advancethe minutes.

*[AS11130(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PMindications.

[AS11135(ALL)11/93] NOTE: On the High-Level Audio System, the clock can be setwith the radio power on or off.



217

[AS12000(ALL)03/94] NOTE: In order to maintain the performance of your cassettestereo system, refer to “Tips on Caring for theCassette Player and Tapes” later in this chapter.

[AS12003(ALL)04/95] The Ford 10-CD Changer System[AS12006(ALL)05/95] The Ford 10-CD Changer is mounted in your center floor

console and holds 10 CDs, all controlled by using the buttonson your High-Level Audio System.

[AS12012(ALL)05/95] Center Floor Console Loading Instructions

[AS12015(ALL)05/95] 1. Open Compact Disc Changer center floor console unit bysliding door to the right (Figure 1).

[AS12018(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050265-A

[AS12021(ALL)04/95] 2. Push “EJECT” button to eject the disc “magazine” (holds 10discs) (Figure 2).

[AS12024(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050266-A


218

[AS12027(ALL)04/95] 3. Load discs into disc magazine slots (numbered 1 through 10)one at a time with labeled surfaces upward, starting withbottom slot number 1 (Figure 3).

[AS12030(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050267-A

[AS12033(ALL)04/95] 4. Insert loaded disc magazine into chamber unit with thearrow on top of the disc magazine pointing toward thechanger (Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fully insertedinto changer.

[AS12036(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050268-A

[AS12039(ALL)05/95] NOTE: To remove one or more compact disc(s) from the discmagazine, push the corresponding lever(s) (numbered1 to 10 on the side of the disc magazine) to the left.Disc(s) will partially come out for easy removal.



219

[AS12045(ALL)04/95] 5. Close unit by sliding changer panel door to the left.

[AS12048(ALL)05/95] The Compact Disc Changer center floor console unit is nowready to play using the controls of your High-Level AudioSystem.

[AS12051(ALL)04/95] How to Operate the Ford 10-CD Changer Using theControls on the Radio

[AS12054(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 10-CD ChangerSystem, you can operate it through the controls of yourHigh-Level Audio System.

[AS12057(ALL)05/95] Several of the controls on the radio operate in the same mannerin CD mode as they do in radio or cassette mode: turning thepower on, volume control and adjusting the bass, treble, speakerbalance or fade.

[AS12060(ALL)04/95] How to begin CD Changer play

[AS12063(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to operate the Compact DiscChanger.

[AS12066(ALL)04/95] Push the “PLAY PROG” button to begin CD play. (The radiowill revert to the CD mode when “PLAY PROG” button ispushed and there is no cassette stored or playing in the cassettedeck.) The 10-CD Changer will automatically begin playing thefirst track (selection) of the first disc loaded in the trunk unit.The display will indicate “CD-##” for track number. Threeseconds after displaying “TR-##”, the display will indicate“##-##” (CD number-Track number).

[AS12069(ALL)04/95] How to change the disc being played

[AS12072(ALL)04/95] When in the CD mode, you can change discs by pressing the“FF” button (to select the next discs) or the “REW” button (toselect previous discs). Play willl begin on the first track of theselected disc.


220

[AS12075(ALL)04/95] If either button is pressed and held, the CD Changer willcontinue fast-forwarding or reversing through the discs in thedisc magazine. During these functions, the display will indicatethe disc number.

[AS12078(ALL)04/95] How to change the track being played

[AS12081(ALL)04/95] Press the right a side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next track of current disc. If the button is held and the lasttrack is reached, the disc changer will automatically beginplaying the last track of the current disc. After the last track hasbeen completed, the disc changer advances to the next disc andbegins play of track 1. The display indicates the track numberwhile seeking.

[AS12084(ALL)04/95] Press the left b side of the “SEEK” button to seek in reverse tothe previous track on the current disc. If a selection has beenplaying for three seconds or more and you press the left bside of the “SEEK” button, the CD Changer will replay thatselection from the beginning.

[AS12087(ALL)04/95] Operating the CD Compression feature

[AS12090(ALL)04/95] The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closertogether for a more consistent listening level.

[AS12093(ALL)04/95] To turn the compression on, press the Dolby B noise reductionk button. (While in the CD Changer mode, the Dolby buttoncontrols the compression function.) When the compressionfeature is activated, the display will indicate “C”.

[AS12096(ALL)04/95] How to stop CD play

[AS12099(ALL)04/95] While in the CD Changer mode, press the “EJCT” button tostop CD play and resume radio play. Also, loading a cassetteinto the cassette deck will stop CD play and begin cassette play.



221

*[AS21050(ALL)12/93] Rear Seat Radio Controls

*[AS21055(ALL)12/93] Using the Rear Seat Radio Controls

[AS21060(ALL)12/93] Rear seat radio controls are standard equipment on all models.

*[AS21065(ALL)12/93] The rear seat radio controls are located behind the driver on theleft hand side of the vehicle. These controls duplicate severalradio functions of the radio and allow the use of headphones inthe vehicle.

[AS21068(ALL)04/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0060676-B

Rear Seat Radio Controls

*[AS21070(ALL)12/93] How to turn the rear seat radio controls on and off

*[AS21075(ALL)12/93] Press memory preset buttons “1” and “3” simultaneously on theface of your radio to turn the rear seat radio controls on. Aheadphones symbol (j) will appear in the display when therear seat controls are on. Press “1” and “3” simultaneouslyagain to turn rear seat radio controls off.


*[AS21085(ALL)12/93] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” rocker switch toincrease volume, and push the left (-) side to decrease thevolume of the rear speakers.

[AS21090(ALL)12/93] NOTE: Rear seat control volume can be set no higher thancurrent radio setting unless speakers are turned off.See note under How to turn speakers on and off.


222

*[AS21095(ALL)12/93] Setting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS21100(ALL)05/94] Push the “BAND” button to change the frequency band.

*[AS21105(ALL)09/94] Using the “MEMORY” button

*[AS21110(ALL)04/95] Push the “MEMORY” button to access the station you have setinto memory button 1 on the face of the radio. Successivelypushing this button will access, numerically, all stations set intothe Station Memory Preset buttons (1 through 5).

*[AS21115(ALL)09/94] How to turn the speakers on and off

*[AS21120(ALL)09/94] When the rear seat controls are on, push the “SPKRS ON-OFF”button to turn all speakers off. Push again to turn all speakerson.

*[AS21125(ALL)12/93] NOTE: Turning the ignition off, then on again will not turnthe speakers back on, if previously turned off by the“SPKRS ON-OFF” button on the rear seat controls.

*[AS21130(ALL)09/94] Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS21135(ALL)12/93] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch to seek tothe next radio station. Press the left (b) side of the “SEEK”rocker switch to seek to the previous radio station.

*[AS21140(ALL)07/94] NOTE: When using the rear seat controls with a High-LevelAudio System, the “SEEK” function on the rear seatcontrols will also function with cassettes, seeking thenext (“SEEK a”) or previous (“b SEEK”) selectionon the tape.

*[AS21145(ALL)12/93] Using headphones with the rear seat controls

*[AS21150(ALL)12/93] Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have been provided on the rearseat controls. Plug headphone(s) into the provided jack(s) tooperate headphones.


Electronic

Sound

System

s223

[AS

21200(A

LL)09/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

67

7-A

Electronic

StereoR

adio

File:wnass.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:19:39 1996

224

[AS

21250(A

LL)09/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

67

8-A

Electronic

StereoR

adiow

ithC

assette

File:wnass.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 08:19:39 1996


225

%*[AS21300(ALL)05/95] Electronic Stereo and Stereo CassetteRadios

*[AS21400(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS21500(ALL)02/95] How to turn the radio on and adjust the volume


*[AS21950(ALL)05/95] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase thevolume. Press the left (-) side of the button to decrease thevolume. Illuminated bars in the display show the relativevolume level.



*[AS22225(ALL)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.Pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM,FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the stationmemory buttons described under How to tune radio stations.

*[AS22300(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio)

*[AS22400(ALL)05/95] There are three ways for you to tune in to a particular station.You can manually locate the station by using the “TUNE”button, “SEEK” the station or select the station by using thememory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency.


226

%*[AS22410(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS22420(ALL)02/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station.You can manually locate the station by using Automatic MusicSearch (“AMS”), “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons, which you canset to any desired frequency.

*[AS22450(ALL)05/95] ■ Using the “TUNE” function


*[AS22730(ALL)05/95] ■ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio(Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS22740(ALL)02/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by first pressing the “AMS” button (display shows“TUNE”) then within approximately five seconds pressingand releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the“SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press andhold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button.



*[AS22900(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)side of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By holding the button down, listenablestations can be passed over to reach the desired station.



227

*[AS23160(ALL)02/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS23170(ALL)07/94] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radiowill begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately a five-second sampling.This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a secondtime. The display flashes “AM” or “FM.”

*[AS23200(ALL)01/95] ■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons

*[AS23325(ALL)05/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AMstations and 10 preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2).

*[AS23400(ALL)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies:




*[AS23900(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock andstation memory preset buttons (if programmed in automode) will need to be reset.

*[AS24000(ALL)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of yourradio


*[AS24225(ALL)05/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button toincrease bass (more “lows”), and push the left (-) side todecrease bass (less “lows”).


228


*[AS24425(ALL)05/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button toincrease the treble (more “highs”), and push the left (-) sideto decrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS24500(ALL)08/89] Speaker features and operation


*[AS24725(ALL)05/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push theright (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound tothe right speakers, and push the left (-) side to shift thesound to the left speakers.


*[AS24925(ALL)05/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push theright (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound tothe front speakers, and push the left (-) side to shift thesound to the rear speakers.


%*[AS25000(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player

*[AS25500(ALL)02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS25600(ALL)02/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly intothe tape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely inand “seated.”



229

*[AS25700(ALL)02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

[AS25800(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The tape track number indicated in the display doesnot necessarily correspond to the tape track or sidenumber on the cassette label. It is used only toindicate when the tape mechanism reverses tracks.

[AS25896(ALL)12/93] Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) function withcassette tape player (if your display shows numerals)

*[AS25897(ALL)03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in thedisplay). Then, push the left (h) button to rewind to thebeginning of the current selection or press the right (g)button to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection.

*[AS25900(ALL)02/95] ■ Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS26000(ALL)03/95] Push the right (g) button to fast forward the tape.

*[AS26100(ALL)02/95] ■ Rewinding the tape

*[AS26200(ALL)03/95] Push the left (h) button to rewind the tape.

[AS26300(ALL)12/93] Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) function withcassette tape player (if your display shows arrows)

[AS26310(ALL)04/92] Press and hold the “AMS” button. Then, push theappropriate fast-wind button, depending upon the directionof the tape travel arrow in the display. For example, if thetape travel arrow is pointing to the left, push the right (g)button to rewind to the beginning of the current selection. Ifthe tape travel arrow is pointing to the right, press the right(g) button to fast forward to the beginning of the nextselection.


230

[AS26500(ALL)12/93] Fast forwarding the tape (if your display shows arrows)

*[AS26650(ALL)03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the fast-wind button with thearrows pointing in the same direction as indicated in thedisplay. For example, if the tape travel arrow in the displayis pointing to the left, press the left (h) button to fastforward the tape. To return to the play mode, press theopposite fast-wind button momentarily, until fast forwardstops.

*[AS26700(ALL)07/90] ■ Rewinding the tape (if your display shows arrows)

*[AS26850(ALL)03/95] To rewind the tape, press the fast-wind button with thearrows pointing in the opposite direction as indicated in thedisplay. For example, if the tape travel arrow in the displayis pointing to the left, press the right (g) button to rewindthe tape. To return to the play mode, press the oppositefast-wind button momentarily, until rewind stops.

*[AS26900(ALL)02/95] ■ How to change the side of the tape being played

*[AS27000(ALL)03/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected atany time by pushing both fast-wind buttons (h and g)at the same time.

*[AS27100(ALL)02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS27250(ALL)02/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT”button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS27300(ALL)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS27400(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

*[AS27550(ALL)05/95] Push station memory button 3 to activate DolbyH B NoiseReduction.



231

*[AS27600(ALL)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes

*[AS27700(ALL)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way itwas meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:

*[AS27750(ALL)02/95] ■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tapeplayer head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tape operation.

*[AS27800(ALL)02/95] ■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should beused. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subjectto breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS27900(ALL)02/95] ■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, highhumidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed toextreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS28001(ALL)02/95] ■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playingby putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes andturning the hub until the tape is tight.

*[AS28101(ALL)02/95] ■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in themechanism. Remove any loose label material before insertinga cassette.

*[AS28200(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not inuse. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

%*[AS28400(ALL)03/95] Clock Operation

*[AS28500(ALL)07/90] How to view the clock mode

*[AS28650(ALL)07/93] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and timein the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio functionwill automatically display the radio frequency forapproximatedly ten seconds before changing back to the clockmode.


232

*[AS28800(ALL)07/90] How to set the clock

*[AS28900(ALL)04/92] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS29025(ALL)03/95] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button, press the “SEEK”button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) toadvance the minutes.

*[AS29200(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PMindications.

%*[AS35200(ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS35300(ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completelyclear and noise-free, such as the following:

*[AS35400(ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS35500(ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distancethe signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FMsignal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond thisdistance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signalbecomes weaker.

*[AS35600(ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS35700(ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area overwhich the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from beingnoise-free.

*[AS35900(ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure between the antenna andstation, some of the signal “bends” around the building, butcertain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the“shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return tonormal.

*[AS36000(ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, thereflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna topick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quitesevere in hilly terrain and depressed roadways.



233

*[AS36100(ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit hasbeen incorporated into this system. This feature automaticallyswitches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS36200(ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions on AMfrequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences,traffic lights and thunderstorms.

*[AS36300(ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture andOverload. This can occur when listening to a weak station andwhen passing another broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although the displayedfrequency does not change. While passing the tower, the stationmay switch back and forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS36400(ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present (common inmetropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver,resulting in considerable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS36500(ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands hasbeen incorporated into this system to reduce strong signalcapture and overload.

%*[AS36600(ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies

*[AS36700(ALL)05/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and theCanadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)establish the frequencies AM and FM radio stations may use fortheir broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530,540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.

*[AS36800(ALL)06/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radiowill tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and nofine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use otherfrequencies.


234

*[AS36900(ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequencywhich is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not anallowable FM broadcast frequency.

%*[AS37000(ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service Information

*[AS37050(ALL)07/90] ■ Warranty

[AS37100(ALL)10/94] Your sound system is warranted for three years/36,000 miles(60,000 km). Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for furtherinformation.

*[AS37150(ALL)07/90] ■ Service

*[AS37200(ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with acomprehensive service and repair program. If anything shouldgo wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Fordauthorized repair centers to assist you.


235

Driving Your Windstar

%*[DR01000(ALL)01/93] Automatic Transaxle Operation%*[DR01100(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

*[DR01200(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift lever is on the steering column. TheOVERDRIVE ON/OFF button is located on the end of thegearshift lever. You can put the gearshift lever in any one ofseveral positions.

[DR01300(ALL)10/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050016-A The steering column gearshift

*[DR01400(ALL)01/93]RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshiftlever from position to position. If you do not hold thebrake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedlyand injure someone.

*[DR01500(ALL)01/93] Once you place the gearshift lever securely into position,gradually release the brake pedal and use the accelerator asnecessary.

File:wndrs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:18:48 1996

236

% [DR01600(ALL)09/93] Brake-Shift Interlock Safety Feature

[DR01700(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle has a special brake-shift interlock safety featurewhich prevents you from shifting out of P (Park) without thebrake pedal depressed. To shift the transaxle out of the P (Park)position, the ignition must be in the ON position and your footmust be pressing on the brake pedal.

[DR01750(ALL)02/96] When parking on a hill, set the parking brake before shiftinginto and out of P (Park). If the parking brake is not set, a clunkor bang may be heard when shifting out of P (Park). This noisecan be considered a normal characteristic.

*[DR01800(ALL)04/95] If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) positionwith the brake pedal depressed:

*[DR01900(ALL)01/93] 1. Shut the engine off and remove the ignition key.

*[DR02000(ALL)01/93] 2. Apply the parking brake.

*[DR02100(ALL)01/93] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clockwise to the firstposition (OFF).

*[DR02200(ALL)04/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N(Neutral) and start the engine.

*[DR02280(ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternateprocedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blownand that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Windstar in this OwnerGuide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFYTHAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING.

%*[DR02500(ALL)06/92] Backing Up

*[DR02600(ALL)01/93] Before shifting into or out of R (Reverse), you should alwayscome to a complete stop.



237

%*[DR02700(ALL)01/95] Driving

*[DR02800(ALL)01/93] When to use N (Neutral)

*[DR02900(ALL)01/93] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transaxle are not locked. Yourvehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline, unless theparking brake or brakes are on.

[DR03000(ALL)05/95] When to use j Overdrive

[DR03100(ALL)06/95] Overdrive is the normal driving position. When the gearshiftlever is placed in j Overdrive , and the Overdrive Off buttonhas not been pressed, the vehicle will automatically upshift tosecond, third and fourth gears. The transaxle will shift into thecorrect gear when the right speed is reached.

%*[DR03200(ALL)02/94] When to use D (Drive) - with the Overdrive Off buttonactivated

[DR03300(ALL)06/94] You will notice that there is only one drive position on yourgearshift indicator (instead of Drive and Overdrive). However,you will find a button and an indicator light located on thegearshift lever. Push in the button on the end of the lever andthe OVERDRIVE OFF light on the end of the gearshift lever willilluminate. With the OVERDRIVE OFF light illuminated, thetransaxle will operate in first, second and third gears and willnot shift into fourth gear. Operating in Drive (OVERDRIVE OFFlight illuminated) provides more engine braking than Overdrivefor descending hills or city driving.

[DR03400(ALL)09/93]


Overdrive button location


238

*[DR03500(ALL)09/93] To return the transaxle to the normal Overdrive operation, pressthe OVERDRIVE ON/OFF button again. Use this button toselect Overdrive or Overdrive Off whenever you drive yourvehicle.

*[DR03700(ALL)02/95] The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on” mode when thevehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected whenthe vehicle was last shut off.

*[DR03900(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the O/D OFF indicator light is flashing on and offrepeatedly when the vehicle is started, there is atransaxle electronic system malfunction. Contact yourdealer as soon as possible.

*[DR04000(ALL)01/93] When to use 2 (Second)

[DR04100(ALL)03/94] Use 2 (Second) when driving on slippery roads or to provideadditional engine braking on downgrades. This positionprovides Second and First gear operation only.

*[DR04200(ALL)12/93] When to use 1 (First)

[DR04300(ALL)05/95] Use 1 (First) to provide maximum engine braking on steepdowngrades. Upshifts from First can be made by manuallyshifting to 2 (Second) or j (Overdrive). 1 (First) gear providesonly first gear operation. If you select First while driving athigher speeds, the transaxle will shift to 2 (Second), and thendownshift to 1 (First) after the vehicle decelerates to the properspeed.

*[DR04400(ALL)06/92] Parking

*[DR04500(ALL)01/93] Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park).This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheelsfrom turning. To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park)position, pull it toward you, push it completelycounterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward theinstrument panel.



239

[DR04600(ALL)05/95] The gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you can notrotate it in a clockwise direction without pulling it toward you.


Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[DR04800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.


Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.

*[DR05000(ALL)06/94] Forced Downshifts

[DR05100(ALL)05/95] To gain extra acceleration in j (Overdrive) (when passinganother vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The transaxlewill automatically downshift to the appropriate gear (third,second or first).

% [DR05200(ALL)04/95] Traction Control (If equipped)[DR05300(ALL)04/95] Traction Control can help improve your traction on slippery

surfaces, but always operate your vehicle within reasonablelimits. Abrupt changes in acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause your vehicle tobehave differently than anticipated, especially when roadconditions vary.

[DR05400(ALL)04/95] To turn Traction Control off, press the button located in theglove compartment while the vehicle is stopped.

[DR05500(ALL)05/95] Traction Control can be turned back on by pressing the buttonagain while the vehicle is stopped or by restarting the engine.


240

%*[DR05700(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle

*[DR05800(ALL)01/93] Your vehicle has power steering. Power steering uses energyfrom the engine to help steer your vehicle.

*[DR05900(ALL)01/93] Never hold the steering wheel in the extreme right or leftposition for more than five seconds if the engine is running.This can damage the power steering pump.

%*[DR06000(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at aconstant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked.If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes moreeffort.

*[DR06100(ALL)01/93] NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking largepotholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collisioninvolving the front end, have the front suspensionand steering checked for possible damage.

%*[DR06200(ALL)03/95] Brakes

*[DR06300(ALL)01/93] When the foot (service) brake pedal is depressed, thehigh-mount brake lamp should illuminate.

*[DR06400(ALL)01/93] Front Disc Brakes

[DR06500(ALL)11/93] The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They only requireperiodic inspection for pad wear.

[DR06525(ALL)04/95] Rear Disc Brakes (If equipped)

[DR06550(ALL)04/95] The rear disc brakes are self-adjusting. They only requireperiodic inspection for pad wear.

[DR06575(ALL)04/95] The rear disc parking brakes need to be adjusted manually.

*[DR06600(ALL)10/94] Rear Drum Brakes

*[DR06700(ALL)01/93] The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting. Automatic adjustmentoccurs through normal use of the brakes.



241

*[DR06800(ALL)01/93] Four-Wheel Anti-lock Brakes

*[DR06900(ALL)01/94] The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) prevents wheels fromcompletely locking up by automatically releasing andre-applying the brakes. During ABS braking, slight brake pedalpulsations may be felt on the driver’s foot. These pulsationsrepresent the rapid cycling of the ABS valves. The pedalpulsations are considered normal ABS operation, and will stopwhen normal braking is resumed or when the vehicle comes toa stop.

%*[DR07000(ALL)12/93] During ABS activation, a mechanical noise may be heard as theABS system cycles. This is normal ABS operation.

*[DR07100(ALL)12/93] The ABS system has self-check capabilities. The system turns onthe ABS warning light each time you start the engine. After theengine is started and the ABS warning light turns off, thesystem performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches4 mph (6 km/h). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABSsystem performs a self test. This is a normal part of the self testfeature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABSwarning light will come on.

[DR07150(ALL)12/93]


The anti-lock brake system light

*[DR07200(ALL)12/93] You should always be careful when braking, even if yourvehicle has the ABS system. Heavy braking on roads with loosesurfaces such as snow or gravel, or roads with severe pavementirregularities could also cause you to lose control of yourvehicle.


242



*[DR07320(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brakewarning light is not lit, the anti-lock system isdisabled but normal brake function remainsoperational.

*[DR07350(ALL)12/93] Ford Motor Company has not found any negative effects ofmobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles withthe ABS system providing that the radio is installed accordingto the radio manufacturer’s instructions. However, if you havehad a mobile radio transmitter installed and the check ABS lightcomes on (at any time other than immediately after turning thekey to the ON position) have your mobile radio dealer inspectthe radio installation. Also, if the ABS system is activated otherthan during maximum braking, have your mobile radioinstallation checked.

%*[DR07400(ALL)12/89] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low”

*[DR07500(ALL)01/93] If the brake pedal seems “low” it may indicate the need for abrake system inspection and/or service. Apply your parkingbrake several times. If the condition has not improved, youshould have your brakes checked as soon as possible.

%*[DR07600(ALL)01/93] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does notaffect the function of the brake system and is normal. However,if the squeal becomes very loud or if it becomes more frequent,return the vehicle to your dealer for inspection.



243


Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/orvehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stoppingability.

%*[DR07800(ALL)01/93] Stopping Distances

*[DR07900(ALL)01/93] Stopping distances vary with different loads and drivingconditions. Use caution when you drive under new conditionsand acquaint yourself with your vehicle’s performance.

%*[DR08000(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

[DR08100(ALL)11/93] Apply the brake pedal evenly. Use the “squeeze” technique.Push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. Thisallows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.


Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.This will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance andmay also cause brake damage.


If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to alower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, asthey may overheat and become less effective.


244

%*[DR08400(ALL)03/95] Using the Parking Brake

*[DR08501(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever you park yourvehicle.

[DR08520(ALL)09/93] The parking brake is a hand operated lever located on the floorof your vehicle just to the right of the driver’s seat.

[DR08530(ALL)09/93] To set the parking brake while parking your vehicle, press thebrake pedal with your right foot and hold it while you fullyapply the parking brake lever.

[DR08540(ALL)03/94] To release the parking brake, press the brake pedal with yourright foot, pull up the lever while depressing the release buttonon the parking brake lever then lower the lever all the way tothe floor.

[DR08600(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050057-B The parking brake



245


When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of theparking brake. Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securely latched in Park(P). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave yourvehicle. Never leave your vehicle unattended while it isrunning. If you do not take these precautions, yourvehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.


If the parking brake is fully released, but the BrakeSystem light remains on, have the brakes checkedimmediately. They may not be working properly.

*[DR09000(ALL)02/94] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, butyou can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in anemergency if the service brakes fail. However, since the parkingbrake does not stop your vehicle as quickly as the normalbrakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly.

%*[DR09100(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR09200(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR09300(ALL)01/93] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handledifferently from your previous vehicle. Use greater care untilyou become accustomed to its features and drivingcharacteristics.

*[DR09400(ALL)01/93] Always operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Abruptchanges in acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations ofthese maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently thananticipated, especially when road conditions vary.


246

*[DR09500(ALL)07/93] For example, even with anti-lock brakes, extreme braking canmake it difficult to control the direction of the vehicle. Use a“squeeze” technique. Push on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing force. This allows the wheels to brake, yet continue toroll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel.

*[DR09600(ALL)01/93] If you release the accelerator abruptly or brake hard whilegoing too fast around a severe curve, your vehicle may changeits direction of travel. Avoid applying the brakes, if possible. Ifyou must apply the brakes, use the “squeeze” techniquedescribed earlier.

*[DR09700(ALL)02/95] Wheel Spin

[DR09800(ALL)05/95] Extreme acceleration can cause the front wheels to spin,resulting in reduced steering control. If the wheels spin duringvehicle start-up, shift to 2 (Second) gear. Move forward slowlyand evenly. If this does not work, try rocking the vehicle.

%*[DR09900(ALL)01/93] Driving at High Speeds


Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility ofloss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds forextended periods of time may result in damage to vehiclecomponents.

*[DR10020(ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). Thetires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.



247

%*[DR10200(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR10300(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

[DR10400(ALL)02/95] ■ Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads.

*[DR10500(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary.

*[DR10600(ALL)01/93] ■ Drive more slowly than you would normally.

[DR10650(ALL)02/95] ■ Do not use speed control.

*[DR10700(ALL)01/95] ■ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

*[DR10800(ALL)01/93] ■ Use the “squeeze” technique for braking as described inprevious braking sections.

*[DR10900(ALL)02/93] ■ Consider using one of the lower gears.


To avoid skidding and losing control on slippery roads,do not downshift into 1 (First) when you are movingfaster than 20 mph (30 km/h).


The Anti-Lock Brake System may not prevent brakelock-up on extremely slippery surfaces.

%*[DR11200(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR11300(ALL)05/90] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that thewater is below the bottom of the wheel hubs.

*[DR11400(ALL)01/93] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You mayhave limited traction or wet brakes so allow extra stoppingdistance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.


248

*[DR11500(ALL)01/93] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakesgently several times as your vehicle moves slowly to help drythe brakes.

*[DR11600(ALL)01/93] Rocking the Vehicle

*[DR11700(ALL)01/93] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), youmay rock it out. Shift in a steady rhythm between forward andreverse gears. At the same time, press lightly on the accelerator.If you are still stuck after a few minutes of rocking, call for atow truck.

[DR11750(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control,make sure the system has been turned off beforeattempting to rock the vehicle.

[DR11775(ALL)04/95] See Traction Control Off Light in the Lights and Gauges section ofthis guide for more information.

*[DR11800(ALL)01/93] Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This mayoverheat the engine, damage the transaxle, or damage the tires.

%*[DR11900(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR12000(ALL)01/93] The Safety Compliance Certification Label, located on thedriver’s door pillar, provides important information regardingthe weight limits your vehicle can safely carry or tow. The totalweight of your vehicle, including the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries onthe front axle and rear axle should never be more than theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle.

*[DR12100(ALL)01/93] The load capacities of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR orGAWR limitations. Using replacement tires with a higher weightlimit than the originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Using lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR andGAWR limitations.



249


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehiclemay be damaged or you may lose control and injuresomeone.

*[DR12300(ALL)01/93] Vehicle/Trailer Loads

[DR12400(ALL)06/94] Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kgs)or 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kgs) with Trailer Tow Package provided theGross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is less than the GVWR shown onthe Safety Compliance Certification Label.

%*[DR12500(ALL)04/95] Towing a Trailer

*[DR12600(ALL)01/93] Towing a trailer puts an additional load on your vehicle’sengine, transaxle, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For yoursafety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipmentfor the type of trailer you tow.

*[DR12700(ALL)02/92] ■ Stay within the load limits when you tow.

*[DR12800(ALL)01/93] ■ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing,making sure to use the right equipment and to attach itproperly. See Preparing to Tow in this section.

*[DR12900(ALL)01/93] ■ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle while you tow.See Driving While You Tow in this section.

*[DR13000(ALL)01/93] ■ Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. SeeServicing Your Vehicle if You Tow in this section.

*[DR13100(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least500 miles (800 km).


250

*[DR13700(ALL)01/93] Vehicle Loading Information

*[DR13800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, notvolume, so you cannot necessarily use all the available space.Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire sizes, rim sizesand inflation pressures are specified for your vehicle at theassembly plant on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.The certification label is located on the pillar in the driver’sdoor opening.

*[DR13900(ALL)01/93] Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo avehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance willsuffer and service concerns may arise.

*[DR14200(ALL)01/93] NOTE: The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front andrear GAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. TheGAWR of the front and rear axles exceed the GVWRwhen added together.

*[DR14500(ALL)01/93] Understanding Loading Information

*[DR14600(ALL)01/93] There are five terms that are used to describe a vehicle’s abilityto carry a load:

*[DR14700(ALL)01/93] ■ Base Curb Weight

*[DR14800(ALL)01/93] ■ Payload

*[DR14900(ALL)01/93] ■ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

*[DR15000(ALL)01/93] ■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

*[DR15100(ALL)01/93] ■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

*[DR15200(ALL)06/92] ■ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[DR15300(ALL)01/93] Base Curb Weight

*[DR15400(ALL)04/95] The base curb weight is the weight of the vehicle including fuel,coolants, lubricants, emergency tools and spare wheel and tire.It also includes any equipment that is standard. It does notinclude passengers, cargo or optional equipment installed byfactory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer.



251

*[DR15500(ALL)01/93] Payload

*[DR15600(ALL)07/93] Maximum payload is the combined, maximum allowable weightof cargo, occupants and optional equipment that the vehicle isdesigned to carry. It is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minusthe base curb weight.

*[DR15700(ALL)01/93] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

*[DR15800(ALL)09/93] The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the total weight of thepassengers, cargo and all equipment.

*[DR15900(ALL)12/93] It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or aspecification, but actual weight. If an owner loads up the vehicleand weighs it, that’s the GVW at that moment. If the owneradds on more of a load and weighs it again, that becomes theGVW.

%*[DR16000(ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

[DR16100(ALL)06/94] To avoid overloading your vehicle, never exceed the specifiedGross Vehicle Weight Rating for your vehicle. The GVWR is themaximum allowable weight of the vehicle when fully loadedincluding passengers, cargo and all equipment.

%*[DR16200(ALL)01/93] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

*[DR16300(ALL)01/93] We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in therear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous conditionthat usually means that the rear suspension components areunder severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. Thereis more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR.

[DR16400(ALL)12/93] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives theGVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)which is the maximum weight allowed on the axle system.


252

*[DR16500(ALL)01/93] The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the weakest axleand suspension component as well as other factors. This is whyit is so important to observe vehicle loading ratings.Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead toshortened service life or outright failure.

*[DR16600(ALL)01/93] The weakest link in the suspension system defines the GAWR,and may be the tires. Tires are rated to carry a specificmaximum load at a specific tire pressure.

*[DR16700(ALL)01/93] When passenger car tires are installed on light trucks andmultipurpose passenger vehicles, they are rated at a 10% lowerload carrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages.

*[DR16800(ALL)01/93] With the tires inflated to the specified pressure, the total weightof your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWRspecified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Thisincludes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants, aswell as the cargo load.

*[DR16900(ALL)05/93] Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

*[DR17000(ALL)01/93] The GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the towingvehicle and the loaded trailer (including all cargo andpassengers).



253

%*[DR17100(ALL)07/93] Calculating the Payload for Your Vehicle

*[DR17200(ALL)03/91] To know how much weight your vehicle can carry:

*[DR17300(ALL)11/93] 1. Obtain the GVWR and GAWR from your Safety ComplianceCertification Label.

[DR17500(ALL)08/93] — If you do not plan to pull a trailer, do not include theseratings into your calculations.

*[DR17600(ALL)11/93] 2. Fill the fuel tank.

*[DR17700(ALL)11/93] 3. Weigh your vehicle without cargo.


254

*[DR17800(ALL)11/93] 4. Subtract vehicle actual weight from the GVWR to find outhow much more weight your vehicle can carry.

*[DR17810(ALL)04/94] 5. Weigh the vehicle again once it is loaded to make sure thatthe GVWR and front and rear GAWR’s are not exceeded.

%*[DR18000(ALL)01/93] Trailer towing table

[DR18050(ALL)08/94]

eight pica

chart:0050061-C

[DR18100(ALL)11/93] If you suspect that your payload is excessive, have your vehicleweighed at a highway weight station or another appropriatecommercial facility. Fill the fuel tank. Weigh the total vehicleand trailer (if applicable), then separately weigh the vehicle atthe front and rear wheels. Finally, weigh the trailer separately ifapplicable.

*[DR18200(ALL)01/93] Trailers

*[DR18300(ALL)01/93] Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on thetongue (usually 10-15% of the trailer weight).

*[DR18400(ALL)07/93] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from yourvehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds either GAWR, shiftthe load or remove cargo accordingly.



255


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehiclemay be damaged or you may lose control and injuresomeone.


Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommendedgross trailer weight exceeds the limits of the vehicle andcould result in engine damage, transaxle/axle damage,structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury.

*[DR18700(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR18800(ALL)05/93] For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the rightequipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure thatall towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. Ifyou are not certain that you are using the right equipment inthe proper manner, see your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer.

%*[DR18900(ALL)01/93] Hitches

*[DR19000(ALL)01/93] For towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg), use a goodweight-carrying hitch and hitch ball which uniformly distributesthe trailer tongue load through the underbody structure.

*[DR19200(ALL)01/93] Do not use single clamp bumper hitches or hitches that attachto the axle.

*[DR19300(ALL)01/93] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sureall mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed toprevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle.


256

*[DR19400(ALL)04/94] Safety chains

*[DR19500(ALL)01/93] Always use safety chains between your vehicle and trailer.Cross chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack forturning corners. Connect safety chains to the vehicle frame orhook retainers. Never attach chains to the bumper.

%*[DR19600(ALL)01/93] Trailer Brakes

*[DR19700(ALL)01/93] Separate trailer brakes are required on most trailers weighingover 1,500 lbs. (680 kg).


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directlyto your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may nothave enough braking power and your chances of havinga collision greatly increase.

%*[DR19900(ALL)01/93] Trailer Lamps

*[DR20000(ALL)01/93] Make sure your trailer lamps conform to federal and localregulations.

*[DR20100(ALL)01/93] Class I Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides two circuits (righthand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Eachstop/turn circuit will operate one combination stop/turn lightbulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer. Never add morethan one trailer light bulb to one circuit.



257


Always replace a fuse with one that has the specifiedamperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperagerating can cause severe wire damage and could start afire.

%*[DR20300(ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow

*[DR20400(ALL)05/95] Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer.Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow inhilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

*[DR20500(ALL)01/93] If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long,steep grades, the speed control may shut off automatically.

*[DR20600(ALL)01/93] When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Driverather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift into2 (Second) or 1 (First) gear.

*[DR20700(ALL)01/95] Servicing your vehicle if you tow

[DR20800(ALL)09/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will needto be serviced more frequently than usual. See the MaintenanceSchedule and Record Booklet.


258

*[DR20900(ALL)01/93] Trailer towing tips

*[DR21000(ALL)11/89] Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backingin an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” ofthe vehicle/trailer combination.

*[DR21100(ALL)01/93] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outsideat the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at thebottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction youwant the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of thesteering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear ofthe trailer.

*[DR21200(ALL)11/89] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning pointso the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions.

*[DR21300(ALL)01/93] Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailerbrakes should be applied first, whether manually orautomatically controlled, when approaching a stop.

*[DR21400(ALL)01/93] For an easy-to-operate vehicle/trailer combination, the trailertongue load should be approximately 10-15% of the loadedtrailer weight.

*[DR21500(ALL)02/94] Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting outon the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km),stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch andelectrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts fortightness.



259

[DR21600(ALL)10/93] When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,place the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) to increase theengine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and airconditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, turn the selectorknob to select the fresh air position to stop the air conditionercompressor. Increase the engine speed for a short time.

*[DR21700(ALL)01/93] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocksunder the trailer’s wheels as follows:

[DR21800(ALL)11/93] 1. Apply the foot service brake pedal and hold.

*[DR21900(ALL)11/93] 2. Have another person place the wheel chocks under thetrailer wheels.

[DR22000(ALL)11/93] 3. With the chocks in place, release the foot service brakepedal, making sure the chocks are holding.

[DR22100(ALL)11/93] 4. Apply the parking brake by pressing the service brake pedaldown firmly with your right foot while applying the parkingbrake lever with your right hand.

*[DR22200(ALL)11/93] 5. Shift the gearshift lever into P (Park).


260

[DR22300(ALL)11/93] Complete the following steps to start your vehicle after it hasbeen parked on a grade:

[DR22400(ALL)11/93] 1. Apply the foot service brake pedal and hold.

*[DR22500(ALL)11/93] 2. Start the engine.

*[DR22600(ALL)11/93] 3. Shift the gearshift lever into gear and release the parkingbrake.

[DR22700(ALL)11/93] 4. Release the foot service brake pedal and move the vehicleuphill to free the wheel chocks.

[DR22800(ALL)11/93] 5. Apply the foot service brake pedal and hold while anotherperson retrieves the chocks.


261

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00700(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00800(ALL)01/93] Your vehicle’s battery may discharge if you leave the lights orany electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If thishappens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster batteryto start your vehicle.

*[RE00900(ALL)02/95]RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed toflames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could resultin injury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging a battery, alwaysshield your face and eyes. Make sure that you canbreathe fresh air.

%*[RE01100(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE01200(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

*[RE01220(ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.

File:wnres.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:18:21 1996

262

*[RE01400(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoidinjury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing yourvehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in theorder they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.

[RE01500(ALL)02/95] To prepare your vehicle for jump-starting:

[RE01600(ALL)02/95] 1. Use only a 12-volt battery to jump-start your vehicle. Yourvehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to use a12-volt jumper system. You can damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connectthem to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteriesin series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

*[RE01700(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the vehicle that needs ajump-start. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

*[RE01800(ALL)03/95] 3. Park the second vehicle close to the hood of your vehicle,but make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set theparking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the enginecooling fan.

*[RE01900(ALL)03/95] 4. Check the battery terminals and remove any excessivecorrosion before you attach the jumper cables.

*[RE02000(ALL)01/93] 5. Turn on the heater blower in both vehicles. Turn off all otherswitches and lights in both vehicles to prevent possibledamage to either vehicle’s electrical systems.



263

% [RE02100(ALL)02/95] To connect the jumper cables:

[RE02200(ALL)02/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. (You can connect either jumpercable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use thesame cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cableshave a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generallyused for the positive terminals and the black for the negativeones.

*[RE02300(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+)terminal of the booster battery.

*[RE02400(ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s)terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the dead battery.

[RE02500(ALL)12/93] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a good, unpaintedmetallic surface in the engine compartment of the vehiclethat needs a jump-start. The following illustration showswhere you can find a metallic surface.


Do not connect the end of the second cable to thenegative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A sparkmay cause an explosion of the gases that surround thebattery.


264

[RE02700(ALL)08/94]

24 pica art:0050022-B

Jumper Cable Placement (3.8L)



265

[RE02750(ALL)04/95]

24 pica art:0050259-B

Jumper Cable Placement (3.0L)

[RE02800(ALL)02/95] After you connect the jumper cables to the batteries:

*[RE02900(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way ofmoving engine parts, then start the vehicle that has thebooster battery. Run the engine at a moderate speed.


266

[RE03000(ALL)02/95] 2. Let the dead battery charge for a few minutes and then startthe vehicle that has the dead battery. If the starter does notcrank, check for good, solid jumper cable clamp attachments.It may take a couple of tries before your vehicle starts. Ifyour vehicle does not start after several attempts, you mayhave a different mechanical problem.

*[RE03100(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a fewminutes to charge the dead battery.

% [RE03200(ALL)02/95] Take the jumper cables off in the following order:

[RE03300(ALL)02/95] 1. Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from themetallic surface in the engine compartment of the vehiclethat needed a jump-start.

*[RE03400(ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the other end of the negative (s) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03500(ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery.

*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from thevehicle that needed a jump-start.

% [RE03700(ALL)02/95] After your vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let theengine “relearn” its idle conditions and drive it around for alittle while with all electrical accessories turned off, to let thebattery recharge. You may need to use a battery charger tofully recharge the battery.



267

%*[RE03800(ALL)01/93] Changing a Flat Tire

*[RE03900(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply thebrake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold thesteering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, setthe parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.

% [RE04000(ALL)02/95] Using the Spare Tire

*[RE04100(ALL)03/94] Your vehicle has a temporary spare tire (unless you ordered theoptional full-size spare tire). This spare tire is smaller than aregular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it onlywhen you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. Thisspare tire is marked with the words TEMPORARY USE ONLYso that you can easily identify it.


If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or donot follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuringyourself or others.

*[RE04300(ALL)02/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT:

*[RE04500(ALL)02/95] ■ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances

*[RE04600(ALL)01/93] ■ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximumvehicle load rating listed on the tire decal

*[RE04700(ALL)01/93] ■ tow a trailer

*[RE04800(ALL)01/93] ■ use tire chains

*[RE04900(ALL)01/93] ■ try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from itswheel


268

*[RE05000(ALL)01/93] ■ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle

*[RE05100(ALL)01/93] ■ drive through an automatic car wash. Because the temporaryspare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces theground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the railsand it could be damaged.

[RE05200(ALL)02/95] Finding the spare tire

[RE05300(ALL)11/93] The spare tire is stored underneath your vehicle, directly belowthe cargo area.

[RE05400(ALL)02/95] Removing the spare tire

*[RE05500(ALL)01/93] 1. Open the liftgate and find the plastic hex nut cover in thecarpeting of the cargo area. Lift the cover to expose the hexnut.

[RE05600(ALL)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050024-BThe spare tire cover



269

*[RE05700(ALL)01/93] 2. Find the tapered lug wrench in the tool kit located behindthe jack in the right cargo area side panel.

*[RE05800(ALL)12/93] 3. Fit the hex-shaped end of the lug wrench over the hex nutin the floor of the cargo area. Turn counterclockwise untilthe cable extends far enough to lower the spare tire to theground.

*[RE05900(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0040172-BThe spare tire in the lowered position

*[RE06000(ALL)01/93] 4. Continue to turn the hex nut counterclockwise until thespare tire retainer can be seen for removal.

*[RE06100(ALL)01/93] 5. Remove the retainer from the center of the wheel. It may benecessary to lift one end of the tire to disengage the retainer.


270

*[RE06200(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0040173-BRemoving the spare tire retainer

%*[RE06800(ALL)03/95] Changing the Tire

*[RE06900(ALL)05/94] You should only raise your vehicle with a jack properly placedat the front or rear jacking points.

*[RE07000(ALL)12/93] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. Put thegearshift lever in P (Park). Set the parking brake and blockthe wheel — in both directions —that is diagonally oppositethe tire that you are changing.


When one of the front wheels is off the ground, thetransaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from movingor slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).

*[RE07200(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change atire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in bothdirections) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (otherside and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.



271

*[RE07300(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone elsecould be seriously injured.


On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF theAir Suspension switch prior to jacking, hoisting ortowing your vehicle.

[RE07400(ALL)10/93] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. See previous section forinstructions on spare tire removal. The jack is located in therear storage compartment in the right door panel of thecargo area. Remove wing bolt to unfasten jack.

[RE07500(ALL)06/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050043-CJack storage


272

*[RE07600(ALL)01/93] 3. Insert the tapered end of the jack handle behind the wheelcover of the tire to be changed and gently pry it off. Whenyou want to replace the wheel cover, simply align the valvestem to the slot in the cover and press it back on.

[RE07700(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050044-A Wheel cover removal

% [RE07800(ALL)10/93] If you have the optional cast-aluminum wheels, remove thewheel cap to gain access to the lug nuts. To remove the cap,insert the tapered end of the jack handle behind the notch inthe wheel and gently pry the cap off. To replace it, press it backon.



273

[RE07900(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050045-A Wheel cover removal (optional cast aluminum wheels)

*[RE08000(ALL)02/95] 4. Fit the hex-shaped end of the lug wrench over the wheel lugnuts and loosen them one-half turn (counterclockwise). Donot remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off theground.

%*[RE08100(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle has the optional locking lug nuts, you mustuse the lug nut removal tool provided with your vehicle’stool kit.

*[RE08200(ALL)02/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040182-A

Anti-theft lug nut


274

*[RE08300(ALL)01/93] 5. Fit the jack under the proper jacking point indicated by thenotch in the bottom of the door frame panel.

[RE08400(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050210-BThe notches for the jack

[RE08500(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050047-B Jack placement

[RE08540(ALL)11/93] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, referto the following illustration before jacking.



275

[RE08550(ALL)11/93]

33-1/2 pica

art:0050211-AJacking information for running boards


276


To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel offthe ground, such as when changing a tire.


To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any partof your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Donot start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack.The jack is only meant for changing the tire.


Never raise your vehicle by using a bumper jack. Thebumper could be damaged or the jack could slip and youcould be injured.

[RE08850(ALL)10/93] NOTE: Never raise your vehicle by placing the jack on thetorsion bar (within axle) or front or rear suspensioncomponents. Serious damage to these components mayoccur.

[RE08900(ALL)11/93] 6. Insert the jack handle into the jack, and slide the tapered endof the jack handle through the slot in the lug nut wrench.All of these tools are needed to jack up a vehicle.



277

[RE09100(ALL)10/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050118-AThe jack and handle assembly

*[RE09200(ALL)01/93] 7. Turn the lug nut wrench (attached to the jack handle)clockwise to raise the vehicle off the ground.

*[RE09300(ALL)01/93] 8. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.

*[RE09400(ALL)01/93] 9. Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire.

*[RE09500(ALL)05/94] 10. Place the wheel lug nuts on the spare tire. Use the lug nutwrench to screw the lug nuts snug against the wheel, but donot tighten fully.

*[RE09600(ALL)02/95] 11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE09700(ALL)01/93] 12. Use the wheel lug wrench to tighten lug nuts in theappropriate sequence. Re-check for complete tightness.


278

%*[RE09800(ALL)09/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040176-A

Lug nut tightening sequence

[RE09900(ALL)11/93] The lug nuts should be tightened to 83-113 ft-lb (113-153 Nm).

*[RE10100(ALL)01/93] 13. Replace the wheel cover by pressing it into place. If youhave the standard wheel covers, you must align the notch inthe wheel cover with the tire’s valve stem and align therecess in the back of the wheel cover with one of the lugnuts. If you have the optional aluminum wheel, press thecenter wheel cap into place after matching up the design ofthe wheel cap to the wheel.

[RE10200(ALL)03/94] 14. Replace the jack in the storage compartment and make surethe jack is securely fastened.

*[RE10300(ALL)01/93] 15. Store the flat tire under the vehicle just as you would storethe spare tire. Refer to the section on Stowing the Spare Tirein this chapter.

[RE10600(ALL)09/93] 16. Unblock the wheels.

*[RE10700(ALL)01/93] Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles(800 km) of operation, after any wheel change, or any time thelug nuts are loosened.



279

*[RE10720(ALL)01/93] Stowing the spare tire

[RE10730(ALL)05/95] 1. To raise the tire to the stowed position, lay the tire on theground with the interior side facing up. Install the retainerthrough the wheel center and slide the tire under the vehicle.Fit the hex-shaped end of the wheel lug wrench over the hexnut in the floor of the cargo area. Turn the wheel lugwrench clockwise until the tire is raised to its originalposition underneath the vehicle.

[RE10740(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The hex nut ratchets when the tire is raised to thestowed position. It will not allow you to over-tighten.

*[RE10750(ALL)01/93] 2. Check for proper seating against the underbody supportsand retighten if necessary.

[RE10760(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Check the tire seating position for looseness and makesure the tire is not too far forward to avoid axle contact.


Make sure spare tires and jacking equipment are stowedand secured in the proper storage location.


280

%*[RE10800(ALL)01/93] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch[RE10900(ALL)05/94] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a

collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been actuated.The shut-off switch is a device that automatically stops the flowof fuel to the engine when your vehicle has been involved in acollision. The impact does not have to be great for the switch tobe actuated. In many instances, you might not even know thatthe switch has been actuated.

*[RE11000(ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pumpshut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index.



281

%*[RE11101(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle

*[RE11201(ALL)06/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professionaltowing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistancecenter. Recommended towing options include wheel lift towingor flat bed towing.

*[RE11500(ALL)03/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind ofvehicle you have. A towing manual is available from FordMotor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual for the properhook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.


283

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-weekhotline with trained operators that put you in touch with thehelp you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to you throughout yourwarranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (3 years or60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase RoadsideAssistance coverages beyond this period, through Ford AutoClub, contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer (notavailable in Canada).

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ■ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ■ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ■ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ■ Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ■ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warrantyrelated tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow,are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towingand repossession).

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in theOwner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Completethe card and place it in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself,Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. Toobtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD(in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

File:wnhss.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:17:31 1996

284

*[HS00800(ALL)01/93] If You Have a Service Concern

*[HS00900(ALL)01/93] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercurydealerships to service your vehicle. This section tells you how toget service or maintenance for your vehicle.

% [HS01510(ALL)04/95] Dealership Service and Maintenance[HS01520(ALL)04/95] Your satisfaction is our #1 goal. If you have questions or

concerns with your vehicle, we suggest you follow these steps:

[HS01530(ALL)04/95] 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at yourselling/servicing dealership.

[HS01540(ALL)04/95] 2. If the inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact theSales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.

[HS01550(ALL)04/95] 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealershiplevel, please contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center.

[HS01560(ALL)04/95] In the United States:

[HS01570(ALL)04/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050105-A


Customer Assistance

285

[HS01640(ALL)04/95] In Canada:

[HS01650(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050104-B

[HS01701(ALL)05/95] Outside the U.S. or Canada:

[HS01720(ALL)04/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040273-C

*[HS02200(ALL)02/95] To process your request, the Ford Customer Assistance Centerneeds the following information:

*[HS02300(ALL)02/95] ■ your telephone number(s) (both business and home)

*[HS02400(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership islocated

*[HS02500(ALL)04/95] ■ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS02600(ALL)04/95] ■ the date purchased

*[HS02700(ALL)03/95] ■ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS02800(ALL)02/95] ■ your 17-digit Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (shown onyour owner card)


286

*[HS03300(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wishto contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

%*[HS03500(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only)

*[HS03600(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independentdispute-settlement program available free to owners or lesseesof qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS03700(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states.Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue thisprocess at any time without notice and without incurringobligations.

*[HS03800(ALL)01/93] What Kinds of Cases Does the Board Review?

[HS03900(ALL)02/95] The Board reviews all product performance and servicecomplaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford andMercury light trucks under warranty that have not beenresolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company, except thoseinvolving:

*[HS04000(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford product

*[HS04100(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford dealership

*[HS04200(ALL)01/95] ■ A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS04300(ALL)01/95] ■ A request for reimbursement of consequential expensesunless incidental to a service or product complaint beingreviewed

*[HS04400(ALL)01/95] ■ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS04500(ALL)01/95] ■ Alleged liability claims

*[HS04600(ALL)01/95] ■ Property damage where such damage is significant whencompared to the economic loss alleged under the warrantydispute


Customer Assistance

287

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] ■ Cases currently in litigation

*[HS04800(ALL)01/95] ■ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, family, orhousehold purposes

*[HS04900(ALL)04/94] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicableexpress written new vehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibilitymay differ according to state law. For example, see theunique brochure for California purchasers/lessees.

*[HS05000(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] ■ three consumer representatives

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] ■ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited andtrained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosenbecause of their business leadership qualities.

[HS05501(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles ofthe date of delivery (warranty start date), you have the right tomake an oral presentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oral presentations may berequested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board bysimple majority vote.

[HS05550(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to eachcomplaint and, based on the available information, arrive at afair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made by each of theinvolved parties.

[HS05600(ALL)08/93] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some caseswill take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board willmake every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.


288

[HS05700(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you itsdecision in writing. It will also provide you with a form toindicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the board are binding on the dealer and Ford, butcustomers may have other options available to them under stateor federal law.

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced intoevidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that maybe initiated.

*[HS06000(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

[HS06101(ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address to request abrochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and aone-page customer application form. The form should becompleted and mailed to the same address.

*[HS06200(ALL)09/93]


*[HS06300(ALL)02/95] You will be sent a brochure and a one-page customerapplication form. To begin the Board review process, the formshould be completed and mailed to the special Board P.O. Boxnumber shown above.

*[HS06400(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

[HS06500(ALL)02/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to beeligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the filenumber assigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and Ford MotorCompany representative are asked to submit statements.


Customer Assistance

289

*[HS06600(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the followinginformation:

*[HS06700(ALL)04/95] ■ legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repairorders that relate to the case

[HS06800(ALL)02/95] ■ the year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number

*[HS06900(ALL)04/95] ■ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS07000(ALL)04/95] ■ the date of repair and the mileage at the time of repair

*[HS07100(ALL)04/95] ■ the current mileage

*[HS07200(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer who sold you the vehicle or whoserviced your vehicle

*[HS07300(ALL)04/95] ■ a brief description of your unresolved complaint

*[HS07400(ALL)05/95] ■ a brief summary of actions that were taken with the dealerand Ford Motor Company

[HS07500(ALL)02/95] ■ the names (if known) of all people you contacted at thedealership

[HS07600(ALL)02/95] ■ a description of the action you want taken to resolve yourconcern

[HS07651(ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanationwill be mailed to you.


290

*[HS07700(ALL)07/93] Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. only)

*[HS07800(ALL)01/93] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causean accident or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS07900(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS08000(ALL)01/93] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area)or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

%*[HS08100(ALL)05/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada

*[HS08200(ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact theappropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure localregulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether youshould import your vehicle to that country.

*[HS08300(ALL)01/93] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to getunleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get onlyfuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or customer assistance center before youleave the U.S. or Canada.


Customer Assistance

291

*[HS08400(ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversionmay damage the effectiveness of your emissions control systemand may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for any damage that iscaused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS08500(ALL)01/93] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back intothe U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS08600(ALL)01/93] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling orliving in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or theMiddle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If thedealership cannot help you, contact:

*[HS08700(ALL)04/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040273-C

*[HS08800(ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Forddealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can directyou to the appropriate Ford affiliate office.

*[HS08900(ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocateoutside of the U.S. or Canada, register your VehicleIdentification Number and new address with Ford MotorCompany Export Operations.


292

%*[HS09000(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer Assistance

*[HS09100(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

[HS09200(ALL)08/93] Owners who wish to telephone the Company may contact theCustomer Assistance Centre using the following telephonenumber or may write to the following address:

[HS09300(ALL)08/93] Please have your 17-digit vehicle identification number available.

*[HS09400(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050104-B

%*[HS09501(ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)

*[HS09600(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot bereached between a vehicle owner, Ford of Canada, and/or oneof its dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the owner maywish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

*[HS09700(ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators toassist consumers in scheduling and preparing for theirarbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s disputeresolution process as outlined under “Service/MaintenanceConcerns (U.S. or Canada)” earlier in this chapter.


Customer Assistance

293

*[HS09800(ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information about theprogram can obtain an information booklet from your dealer orcontact the Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan, at the address or telephone number shownbelow.

*[HS09900(ALL)05/95] O & P Services

595 Bay Street — Suite 300

Toronto, Ontario

M5G 2C2

Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685


295

Accessories

[AC00500(ALL)12/93] Ford Accessories for Your Windstar[AC00600(ALL)11/93] Many accessories for your Windstar are available through your

local authorized dealer. These accessories have been designed tomeet your needs and are custom designed to complement thestyle and aerodynamics of your vehicle. Some of the availableaccessories are listed below.

*[AC00700(ALL)01/93] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

*[AC00800(ALL)06/93] Comfort and Convenience

[AC00900(ALL)04/95] Engine Block Heater (Standard in Canada)

Remote Keyless Entry

*[AC01000(ALL)01/93] Protection and Appearance Equipment

[AC01100(ALL)04/95] Aero Running Boards

Molded Running Boards

Carpet Floor Mats

Cleaners, Waxes and Polishes

Front End Cover

Front End Mini Cover

Lubricants and Oils

Side Window Shields

Styled Wheel Protector Locks

Rear Air Deflector

Door Edge Guards

File:wnacs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:17:13 1996

296

[AC01200(ALL)12/93] Audio Equipment

[AC01300(ALL)12/93] CD Changer

*[AC01400(ALL)01/93] Safety Equipment

*[AC01500(ALL)11/93] Vehicle Security Systems

*[AC01600(ALL)01/93] Travel Equipment

[AC01700(ALL)05/95] Soft Luggage Carrier

Aero Hood Deflector

Factory Luggage Rack & Adaptors

Trailer Hitch (Class II)

Console

*[AC01800(ALL)03/94] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, andluggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the totalweight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rearaxle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label). Consult your dealerfor specific weight information.

*[AC01900(ALL)04/94] NOTE: Devices that emit radio frequency (RF) energy such asAM/FM radios, mobile communication systems(two-way radios, telephones) and radio controlledsecurity systems, are subject to the rules andregulations of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15. Any suchsystem installed in your vehicle should comply withthose rules and should be installed only by aqualified technician. In addition, to insure continuedcompliance with the FCC’s requirements, RF devicesmust not be modified or changed in a manner notexpressly approved by Ford Motor Company.


Accessories

297

*[AC02000(ALL)05/94] NOTE: Mobile communication systems, particularly if notproperly installed, may adversely affect the operationof the vehicle. For example, such systems, whenoperated, may cause the engine to stumble or stall. Inaddition, such systems may themselves be damaged,or their operation affected, by the operation of thevehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage dooropeners, and other transmitters whose power output is5 watts or less, ordinarily will not affect vehicleoperation.)

*[AC02100(ALL)04/94] NOTE: Because Ford has no control over the operation ormanufacture of such systems or their installation, Fordcannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects ordamage if this equipment is used.


298

[AC03100(ALL)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050270-A


Accessories

299

[AC03200(ALL)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050271-A


300

[AC03300(ALL)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050272-A


301

Servicing Your Windstar

*[SV01300(ALL)03/95] How Ford Makes Servicing Your VehicleEasy

*[SV01400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV01500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to beserviced.

*[SV01600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible.To help you:

*[SV01700(ALL)01/93] ■ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in your enginecompartment so that you can find them easily.

*[SV01800(ALL)01/95] ■ When possible, we design parts — such as the headlampbulbs — that can be replaced without tools.

[SV01900(ALL)03/94] ■ We give you a Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet thatmakes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy.

*[SV02000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need tocheck and service regularly.

[SV02100(ALL)03/94] If you need professional servicing, see the chapter on CustomerAssistance in this Owner Guide.

[SV02200(ALL)02/95] Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which partsare covered.

%*[SV02300(ALL)03/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle

*[SV02400(ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.Here are some general precautions for your safety:

*[SV02500(ALL)03/95] ■ If you must work with the engine running, avoid wearingloose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in movingparts.

*[SV02600(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with theengine running, unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

File:wnsvs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:16:43 1996

302

*[SV02700(ALL)01/95] ■ Never get under a vehicle while it is supported by a jackonly. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02800(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials awayfrom the battery and all fuel-related parts.

*[SV02900(ALL)03/95] Working Under the Hood

[SV03000(ALL)02/95] Before you open the hood, read this section carefully.

*[SV03100(ALL)02/95] If you plan to work under the hood while the engine isoff:

*[SV03200(ALL)01/93]RWARNING

Set the parking brake and make sure the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV03300(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Always remove the key from the ignition after you turnoff the engine.

*[SV03400(ALL)03/95] If you must work under the hood while the engine ison:

[SV03500(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Set the parking brake and make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.


Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry that can get caughtin the moving parts.



303


Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removedand do not remove it while the engine is running.

%*[SV03800(ALL)03/95] To open the hood:

[SV03900(ALL)12/93] 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.

[SV04000(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050053-B Hood release lever location

[SV04100(ALL)10/93] 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondaryhood latch under the hood in the front center of the vehicle.

*[SV04200(ALL)01/93] 3. Lift the hood and release the prop rod from its retainingclip. Place the end of the prop rod in the prop rod holeprovided on the underside of the hood.


304

[SV04300(ALL)06/94]

24 pica art:0050028-B

Propping the hood

*[SV04400(ALL)01/93] To close the hood:

*[SV04500(ALL)01/93] 1. Remove the prop rod from the slotted hole in the hood.Place the rod in its retaining clip and close the hood withenough force to make it latch. Be sure to oil the hood latchevery six months to maintain smooth operation.

*[SV04600(ALL)01/93] 2. Try to lift the hood after closing it to be sure it is securelylatched.



305

%*[SV04700(ALL)01/93] Engine Compartment[SV04800(ALL)08/94] Your vehicle has a 3.0 liter SFI, V-6 engine or an optional 3.8

liter SFI, V-6 engine. The following illustrations show diagramsof your engine and where you can find items you shouldservice regularly.


306

[SV04900(ALL)08/94]

33-1/2 pica

art:0050234-BThe engine compartment (3.0 liter only)



307

[SV05000(ALL)04/95]

33-1/2 pica

art:0050038-CThe engine compartment (3.8 liter only)


308

*[SV05100(ALL)03/95] What to Check When You Stop at a ServiceStation

%*[SV05200(ALL)03/95] Filling Your Fuel Tank With Fuel

[SV05750(ALL)11/93] 1. Open the fuel door (located on the driver’s side of thevehicle).

[SV05800(ALL)11/93] 2. Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure on the plastic capand rotating the fuel cap counterclockwise.

[SV05900(ALL)11/93] 3. Turn the fuel cap 3/4 of a turn until a hissing sound isheard. Wait until the hissing sound stops and then continuerotating counterclockwise to remove the fuel cap.

[SV06000(ALL)11/93] 4. Follow the fuel cap removal instructions and use caution tominimize the possibility of fuel spraying when you unscrewthe cap.


If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until it stops before completely removing thecap.

[SV06060(ALL)04/95] RWARNING

Turn the fuel cap 3/4 of a turn to relieve any pressureand vacuum in the fuel tank. The cap will startunthreading after 3/4 of a turn.



309

[SV06100(ALL)09/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050054-AThe fuel door

*[SV06200(ALL)01/93] To replace and secure the fuel cap, place it in position androtate it clockwise until it clicks (ratchets). The ratchetingmechanism allows the fuel cap to be sealed withoutovertightening.

[SV06290(ALL)05/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraftor equivalent part.

%*[SV06300(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in thefuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to workimproperly in a collision.

*[SV06600(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuelfiller cap, the customer warranty may be void for anydamage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.


310

*[SV06700(ALL)05/95] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormal condition. It may becaused by:

*[SV06800(ALL)05/95] ■ too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions. Service stationssometimes sell winter grade fuel in the summer.

*[SV06900(ALL)01/93] ■ pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at high altitudes.

*[SV07000(ALL)05/95] ■ extended periods of idling with the engine RPM increasedabove the normal idle range.

*[SV07100(ALL)05/95] ■ parking the vehicle in full sunlight for extended periods onextremely hot days.

%*[SV07200(ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

*[SV07300(ALL)05/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuelis prohibited by federal law. Any vehicle damage may not becovered by your warranty.

% [SV07450(ALL)02/95] Octane recommendations

*[SV07550(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular gasoline with anoctane rating of 87.

*[SV07650(ALL)03/95]


Typical octane rating label



311

[SV07750(ALL)02/95] We do not recommend gasolines labeled “regular” that are soldwith octane ratings of 86 or even less in high altitude areas.

%*[SV07850(ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly.However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions onthe recommended octane rating fuel, see your dealer or aqualified service technician to prevent any engine damage.

%*[SV07950(ALL)05/95] Fuel quality

*[SV08050(ALL)02/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle, or hesitationproblems try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists,see your dealer or qualified service technician.

*[SV08850(ALL)05/95] It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products toyour fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel.


312

%*[SV08950(ALL)04/95] Gasolines for clean air

*[SV09050(ALL)05/95] Ford approves the use of gasolines, including thosereformulated, that contain oxygenates such as ethanol (10%maximum), and MTBE (15% maximum). If methanol is used, thegasoline should contain no more than 5% with cosolvents.

%*[SV10200(ALL)05/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death ifmisused or mishandled.

*[SV10400(ALL)05/95] Gasoline and other automotive fuels are extremely flammable.Turn your vehicle off and do not smoke while refueling yourvehicle. Keep sparks and other sources of ignition away fromfuels.

*[SV10500(ALL)02/95] Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Neverattempt to siphon any fuel by mouth.

*[SV10600(ALL)02/95] If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison controlcenter immediately. Do not delay calling a physician merelybecause no adverse effects are noticed at first; the toxic effectsof fuels may not become apparent for many hours.



313

*[SV10700(ALL)02/95] If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. If agasoline-methanol blend is swallowed, induce vomiting underthe direction of a physician or poison control center.

*[SV10800(ALL)02/95] Gasoline and gasoline-methanol blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure tounleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Excessive inhalation of fuel vapors can cause headache,dizziness, nausea, poor coordination, and other symptoms whichcould interfere with your ability to safely operate your vehicle.Avoid breathing vapors while refueling. If fuel vapors areinhaled in excessive quantities, move the victim to fresh air andseek medical attention.

*[SV10900(ALL)02/95] Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. Becareful not to splash fuel on yourself or your clothing. If fuel issplashed on the skin, promptly remove contaminated clothingand wash the skin thoroughly with soap and water.

*[SV11000(ALL)05/95] Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly eye damage. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn),flush with large amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seekmedical attention.

*[SV11100(ALL)05/95] You should be particularly careful if you are taking themedication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for thetreatment of alcoholism. There is a possibility that breathing thevapors of a gasoline-methanol blend, or skin contact with such ablend, may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinkingan alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personalinjury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly ifyou experience an adverse reaction.

[SV12050(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this situation mayhave an adverse effect on modern powertraincomponents.


314

%*[SV12100(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

*[SV12200(ALL)01/93] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level groundaway from traffic. Add at least two gallons (8 liters) of fuel tostart your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground,you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to startit.

[SV12300(ALL)02/95] You may need to turn the ignition to START several timesbefore engaging the starter (leaving it in that position severalseconds each time) before the fuel system starts to pump fuelfrom the tank to the engine.

%*[SV12400(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV12500(ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicleand can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per100 Kilometers (L/100K).

*[SV12600(ALL)01/93] To calculate the fuel economy:

*[SV12700(ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record the inital odometerreading.

*[SV12800(ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons orliters) purchased.

*[SV13000(ALL)01/93] 3. Divide the total number of miles that you have driven bythe total number of gallons that your vehicle has used. Thiswill give you the average numbers of miles per gallon.

*[SV13100(ALL)05/93] In metric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 anddivide the answer by the number of kilometers traveled. Thiswill give you the number of liters used per 100 km.



315

*[SV13200(ALL)01/93] Comparisons With Environmental Protection Agency(EPA) Fuel Economy Estimates

[SV13300(ALL)02/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory testsunder simulated road conditions and therefore are estimateswhich may not reflect the actual conditions you experience. Thetests also do not exactly duplicate your personal style ofdriving, including all your stops, starts, and lane changes. Otherfactors that may affect fuel economy include using the airconditioning, driving speed, vehicle load and tire inflationpressure. The EPA fuel economy estimate is not a guaranteethat you will achieve the fuel economy shown.

%*[SV13400(ALL)05/95] Improving Fuel Economy

[SV13500(ALL)11/93] You can improve the fuel economy for your vehicle in threeways:

[SV13600(ALL)09/93] 1. Maintain your vehicle effectively. A well-tuned, properlymaintained vehicle gives you better fuel economy. Follow theschedules for maintaining your vehicle that are in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

[SV13700(ALL)02/95] 2. Drive your vehicle efficiently. Change your driving habits toconserve fuel:

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not drive with your foot on the brake.

[SV13900(ALL)05/95] ■ Watch traffic so that you do not have to stop suddenly.

[SV14000(ALL)02/95] ■ Do not accelerate suddenly. Drive at a steady speedwhenever you can.

*[SV14100(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not let the engine idle for a long time.

[SV14200(ALL)02/95] ■ Do not carry loads that are too heavy. To find out the limitsfor the loads that your vehicle can carry, see Driving with aheavy load in the Index.


316

[SV14300(ALL)02/95] ■ Keep the tires properly inflated. To find out therecommended tire pressure, see Checking the pressure of thetires later in this chapter.

[SV14400(ALL)02/95] ■ Use your air conditioning system wisely. To find out aboutfuel economy and air conditioning, see Climate control systemsin the Index.

[SV14500(ALL)02/95] In addition to your individual driving habits, optionalequipment, such as air conditioning, can have a significant effecton fuel economy. Various aftermarket add-on items that increaseaerodynamic drag can also reduce fuel economy.

%*[SV14600(ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV14750(ALL)04/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oilmeeting Ford Specification ESE-M2C153-E and displaying theAmerican Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on thefront of the container.

*[SV14800(ALL)03/95] Use only engine oils displaying the American PetroleumInstitute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container:

*[SV14850(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001314-AThe API Certification Mark



317

*[SV15000(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV15100(ALL)01/95] ■ “Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV15200(ALL)04/95] ■ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV15300(ALL)01/95] ■ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or enginetreatments

%*[SV15400(ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED foryour vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fueleconomy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV15550(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferredviscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oilfilter must still be changed according to the maintenanceschedule.

%*[SV15600(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV15700(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safeengine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time youput fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on levelground.

%*[SV15800(ALL)03/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV15900(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a fewminutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV16000(ALL)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park).

*[SV16100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

[SV16200(ALL)08/94] 4. Locate the dipstick labelled “Engine Oil” and carefully pull itout of the engine.

*[SV16300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, makingsure it is fully seated.


318

[SV16400(ALL)02/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050073-D

Engine oil dipstick

*[SV16500(ALL)02/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is belowthe “ADD 1 QT.” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oillevel is beyond the letter “F” in FULL, engine damage orhigh oil consumption may occur and some oil must beremoved from the engine.

*[SV16600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated.

*[SV16700(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Makesure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity.Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if enginedamage is caused by the use of improper engine oil.

*[SV16800(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow.To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oilinto the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheckthe oil level after you finish adding oil.

%*[SV16900(ALL)01/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

*[SV17200(ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet foradditional information.

% [SV18200(ALL)12/93] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.



319


Continuous contact with USED motor oil has causedcancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV18320(ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and water.

%*[SV18400(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV18500(ALL)02/95] Checking the engine coolant

[SV18600(ALL)11/93] Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine fromoverheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter.Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, butpreferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply check the coolantreservoir, located in the engine compartment. The coolantshould stay slightly above the “FULL COLD” mark.

*[SV18700(ALL)01/95] Adding engine coolant


Do not put engine coolant in the container for thewindshield washer fluid.

*[SV18920(ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or antifreeze couldmake it difficult to see through the windshield.


320

[SV18950(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050025-BEngine coolant recovery reservoir fill location

%*[SV18975(ALL)01/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid or an equivalentengine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. Donot use alcohol or methanol antifreeze and do not use enginecoolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. If you donot use the proper coolant, the aluminum radiator on yourvehicle will corrode.

*[SV19000(ALL)01/93] Whenever you remove the radiator cap, make sure that you alsocheck the condition of the radiator cap rubber seals. Make surethey are clean and free of any dirt. Rinse off with water, ifnecessary. When you replace the radiator cap, make sure theradiator filler neck seats are clean. Also check that the overflowhose is not kinked or turned in such a way that prevents aneasy flow.



321

*[SV19100(ALL)02/95] Never remove the radiator cap while the engine is running orhot. If you must remove the radiator cap, follow these steps toavoid personal injury that can be caused by escaping steam orengine coolant.

*[SV19300(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off and let it cool before removing theradiator cap. You should exercise care when removing thecap, even from a cooled engine.

*[SV19400(ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the capand turn it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop.

*[SV19500(ALL)02/95] 3. Step back while the pressure is released.

*[SV19600(ALL)04/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,use the cloth to press, turn, and remove cap.

[SV19700(ALL)02/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening while removing thecap. Hot steam may blow out or hot engine coolant maysplash out.

%*[SV19800(ALL)01/93] Freezing Protection

*[SV19900(ALL)01/93] The factory-installed solution of Ford Premium Cooling SystemFluid and water will protect your vehicle to s35˚F (s37˚C).Check the freeze protection rating of the engine coolant at leastonce a year, just before winter.

% [SV20000(ALL)02/95] Add engine coolant only to the engine coolant recoveryreservoir — not to the radiator. If the coolant level is low, addto the engine coolant recovery reservoir a 50/50 mixture ofwater and the type of engine coolant that Ford specifies. If thecoolant recovery reservoir is empty, you should also check theradiator to see if it is low. Check the coolant level again thenext few times you drive your vehicle.

*[SV20100(ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an optimized formulathat will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Fordengines for four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to use supplemental coolant


322

additives in your gasoline powered vehicle. These additives mayharm your engine cooling system. Follow the recommendedservice interval for changing your engine coolant.

*[SV20200(ALL)11/93] NOTE: When adding to or changing your engine coolant, it isimportant to maintain a coolant concentration between40% (s11˚F [s24˚C]) and 60% (s62˚F [s52˚C])depending on your local climate conditions. Whencoolant concentration falls below 40%, you will losefreeze protection; above 60%, your engine mayoverheat on a warm day. If coolant concentration isoutside this range, you may lose corrosion and rustprotection for the metals in your engine coolingsystem.

[SV20300(ALL)01/93] NOTE: Do not use an engine coolant that does not meet all14 requirements of Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.The use of a coolant that does not meet the 14requirements may void your warranty for the enginecooling system. Use only a premium, nationallyrecognized brand name engine coolant.

*[SV20400(ALL)02/94] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the Ford Rotundaengine coolant recycling process and chemicals. Use only FordRotunda recycled engine coolant or an equivalent non-FordRotunda recycled engine coolant that is certified by the supplierto meet Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.

%*[SV20500(ALL)01/93] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

*[SV20700(ALL)01/93] Leave the coolant in all year. Make sure that the coolant willnot freeze at the temperature level in which you usually driveduring winter months. Keep an engine coolant in your enginethat has a protection rating of at least s20˚F (s29˚C).



323

*[SV20800(ALL)01/93] To find out how much engine coolant mixture your vehicle’scoolant system can hold, see Refill Capacities later in this chapter.

[SV20900(ALL)02/95] You may add water by itself only in an emergency, but youshould replace it with a 50/50 mixture of water and coolant assoon as possible.

*[SV21000(ALL)02/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks ifyou have to add engine coolant more than once a month, oryou have to add more than a quart (liter) at a time.

%*[SV21100(ALL)11/94] Checking hoses

*[SV21200(ALL)01/93] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration,leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing enginecoolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements are necessaryusing Motorcraft parts or their equivalents.

%*[SV21300(ALL)05/95] Engine coolant drain and flush

[SV21400(ALL)11/93] To drain and flush your engine coolant, you MUST see yourFord dealer or refer to the procedure in the service manual.Failing to do so could result in engine damage.

%*[SV21505(ALL)05/95] Battery

*[SV21510(ALL)02/95] The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not requireadditional water during its life of service. The vents are part ofthe cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-freeoperation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, makecertain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the batteryterminals.

*[SV21515(ALL)02/95] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals,remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with awire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are donecleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the topof each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion.


324

*[SV21520(ALL)06/95] Battery Replacement

*[SV21525(ALL)02/95] If your original equipment battery requires replacement whileunder warranty, it may, in some cases, be replaced by aMotorcraft low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenancebattery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolytelevel and for adding water, if needed.

*[SV21530(ALL)02/95] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at least every 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20,000 km), in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C).Keep the electrolyte in each cell up to the “level” indicator. Donot overfill the battery cell.

*[SV21535(ALL)05/95] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low, you can addplain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hardwater (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible,however, try to only fill the battery cell with distilled water. Ifthe battery needs water often, have the charging systemchecked.

%*[SV21540(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV21545(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acidbatteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility fordisposal.

*[SV21550(ALL)02/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040201-A

Battery recycling symbol



325


The gases around the battery can explode if exposed toflames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could resultin injury or vehicle damage.

%*[SV21560(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

*[SV21562(ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.

%*[SV21570(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[SV21580(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers%*[SV21600(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

[SV21700(ALL)02/95] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time youstop for fuel. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on thefront, passenger side of the engine compartment. This reservoircontains the fluid for both the windshield and liftgate washers.


Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container forthe engine coolant.


326

[SV22000(ALL)12/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050050-B Windshield washer fill location

%*[SV22100(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather thanplain water, because specially formulated washer fluids containadditives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanolshould be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F[0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze,methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they provide cold weatherprotection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiperblades, and windshield washer system.


Washer solution contains methanol which is poisonous.

[SV22250(ALL)04/95] When adding windshield washer solution, be sure to observe allwarnings indicated on the washer solution container.



327

%*[SV22300(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

[SV22400(ALL)02/95] Check the windshield wipers at least twice a year. Also checkthem whenever they seem less effective than usual. Suchsubstances as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wipers.

*[SV22500(ALL)01/93] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshieldand the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solutionor a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do notuse fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean yourwiper blades. These will damage your blades.

[SV22550(ALL)04/95] Your wipers have a service feature that allows you to pull thewiper arms and blades away from the windshield and into anupright position. This service position allows you easy access tothe blades from either side of your vehicle.

*[SV22600(ALL)04/95] To reach the wiper blades easily, turn the ignition switch toACCESSORY and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to OFF. Moving thewipers manually may damage them.

*[SV22700(ALL)03/95] Replacing the wiper blades

*[SV22800(ALL)01/95] If the wipers still do not work properly after you clean them,you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly. Whenreplacing the wiper blade assembly always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent.

*[SV22900(ALL)10/93] To replace the wiper blades:

*[SV23000(ALL)04/95] 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and lock intothe service position.

[SV23100(ALL)04/95] 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Squeeze thelock tabs of the plastic clip together to release the blade andpull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to removeit from the arm.


328

*[SV23200(ALL)03/94] 3. Attach a new wiper blade to the wiper arm and press it intoplace until you hear it click.

%*[SV23400(ALL)03/95] Tires[SV23500(ALL)02/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire

looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them.

[SV23600(ALL)02/95] ■ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. SeeChecking the pressure of the tires later in this chapter.

*[SV23700(ALL)01/93] ■ Stay within the recommended load limits. See Driving with aheavy load in the Index.

*[SV23800(ALL)02/95] ■ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly distributed.

*[SV23900(ALL)10/89] ■ Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24000(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or goflat.



329


Always obey posted speed limits. If you drive too fastfor road conditions, you could lose control of yourvehicle. Under some circumstances, driving at very highspeeds for extended periods of time may damage vehiclecomponents, creating a risk of component failure and apotential loss of vehicle control. Any time you losecontrol of your vehicle, it may result in injury.

[SV24300(ALL)12/93] At least once a month, check the pressure in all your tires,including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Checkthe tire pressure when tires are cold, that is, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or has been driven lessthan 3 miles (5 km). You can find the proper cold tire pressureon the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on thedriver’s door pillar.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling andcan fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.

%*[SV24800(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

[SV24900(ALL)02/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform differentjobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wearevenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with yourvehicle.


330

[SV25100(ALL)03/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050224-ARotating the tires

*[SV25300(ALL)01/93] If your vehicle has the optional full-size spare tire, you mayrotate the spare tire into the rotation pattern.

[SV25500(ALL)11/93] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you may remove thefull-size (if equipped) spare tire from the wheel and remount iton an aluminum wheel to rotate the spare tire into yourvehicle’s rotation pattern.

%*[SV25600(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV25700(ALL)01/93] Replace tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows awear band, it has only 1/16 of an inch (1.59 mm) of tread left.

*[SV25800(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040200-A

A worn-out tire



331

*[SV25900(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may needto replace them before a wear band appears across the entiretread. Some spots wear more heavily than others.


When replacing full size tires, never mix radial,bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes thatare listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that alltires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carryingcapacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended onthe decal. If you do not follow these precautions, yourvehicle may not drive properly and safely.


Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size,type, load-carrying capacity, and tread design (e.g. “AllTerrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.


Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tiresor larger size tires.


Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies may damage yourvehicle or cause accidents resulting in serious injuries.


Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affectthe handling of the vehicle and make it easier to losecontrol and roll over.


332

*[SV26400(ALL)01/93] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tiresmay affect the accuracy of your speedometer and odometer.

%*[SV27400(ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV27500(ALL)01/93] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire QualityGrade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. TheseTire Quality Grades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation has set.

*[SV27600(ALL)12/93] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use onthis vehicle. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (254-305 mm) orlimited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

*[SV27700(ALL)01/93] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: TheU.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactly as thegovernment has written it.

%*[SV27800(ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV27900(ALL)01/93] The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.



333

*[SV28000(ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

[SV28100(ALL)12/93] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C,and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction testsand does not include cornering (turning) traction.

*[SV28300(ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

[SV28400(ALL)12/93] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stadard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

%*[SV28700(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28800(ALL)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that providetraction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months insome climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


334


When using snow tires, make sure they are the same sizeand grade as the tires you normally use on your vehicle.

*[SV29000(ALL)02/95] Do not use chains when using a temporary spare. For full sizetires, use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the lawrequires them where you live. When you use the tire chains:

*[SV29100(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure the chains are the right size for your tires. Useonly SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage yourvehicle.

*[SV29200(ALL)01/93] ■ Put chains on tightly with the ends held down securely.Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV29300(ALL)01/93] ■ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub or bang againstyour vehicle, stop the vehicle and tighten the chains. If youcontinue to hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle,remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

*[SV29400(ALL)10/94] ■ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV29500(ALL)05/94] ■ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity after using themon snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

[SV29520(ALL)10/93] Limited chain clearance exists with P215/70R15 tires. If yourvehicle is equipped with these tires, extra care must be observedto avoid damage with chains.

[SV29530(ALL)10/93] Be sure:

[SV29535(ALL)10/93] ■ The chains are fully tightened

[SV29540(ALL)05/95] ■ The vehicle is driven below 30 MPH (50 km/h)

[SV29550(ALL)10/93] ■ The vehicle is lightly loaded

[SV29560(ALL)10/93] ■ To avoid sharp turns



335

*[SV29600(ALL)01/93] Make sure your suspension insulators and bumpers are notmissing or worn to avoid damage to your vehicle.

%*[SV29700(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29800(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash yourvehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover toremove grease and tar.

*[SV29900(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes areabrasive.

*[SV31300(ALL)05/95] Automatic Transaxle Fluid[SV31400(ALL)08/94] Under normal circumstances, you need to change the fluid at

30,000 miles (48,000 km) for normal operating conditions or21,000 miles (34,000 km) for severe duty. However, if thetransaxle is not working properly (for example, slipping orshifting slowly), or you notice some sign of fluid leakage, thefluid level should be checked.

*[SV31500(ALL)01/93] It is best to check the transaxle fluid level at normal operatingtemperature, after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level withouthaving to drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a normal operatingtemperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

*[SV31600(ALL)01/93] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extendedperiod at high speeds or in city traffic during hotweather, or if it has been pulling a trailer, the engineshould be turned off for about 30 minutes to allowthe fluid to cool before checking.


336

%*[SV31700(ALL)02/93] Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV31800(ALL)01/93] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and movethe gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges allowingsufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch thegearshift lever in the P (Park) position, fully set the parkingbrake and leave the engine running.

*[SV32000(ALL)01/93] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out and wipe theindicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube andmake sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read thefluid level.

[SV32100(ALL)10/93] When checking fluid at normal operating temperature, the fluidlevel should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick.

[SV32200(ALL)08/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0050021-A

The automatic transmission dipstick

[SV32250(ALL)11/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven until some fluidhas been added if the fluid level is below the bottomhole on the dipstick and the outside temperature isabove 50˚F (10˚C). Add only enough fluid to bring thelevel above the bottom hole. The fluid level should berechecked at normal operating temperature.



337

%*[SV32300(ALL)01/95] Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV32400(ALL)04/95] The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding anyfluid, be sure that the correct type will be used.

*[SV32500(ALL)05/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (0.25 liter) increments through the fillertube to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If anoverfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.

%*[SV32600(ALL)01/93] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

*[SV32700(ALL)06/94] NOTE: Always use Motorcraft MERCONH or equivalentMERCONH automatic transaxle fluid when you refillyour automatic transaxle fluid.

%*[SV32800(ALL)02/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV32900(ALL)05/90] Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator inthe master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light onthe instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low.

*[SV33000(ALL)01/93] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use upbrake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluidto slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and thebrake pads wear.

*[SV33100(ALL)10/89] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this bylooking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on the mastercylinder. The fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark.


Brake fluid is toxic.


338

*[SV33220(ALL)05/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If takeninternally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

%*[SV33300(ALL)02/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the filler capfrom the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with FordHigh Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or DOT3 equivalent fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A.

[SV33550(ALL)05/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050216-B The brake fluid reservoir


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you willcause permanent damage to your brakes.

*[SV33700(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[SV33800(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below theseam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have thebrake system inspected.



339


Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry.This may cause the brakes to fail.

%*[SV34100(ALL)02/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV34200(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice ayear (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

*[SV34300(ALL)03/95] To check the level of your power steering fluid:

[SV34400(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluidreaches normal operating temperature. The power steeringfluid will reach the right temperature after at least fiveminutes of idling or at least one mile (1 km) of driving.

*[SV34500(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back andforth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly isinstalled at this time.

*[SV34600(ALL)03/93] 3. Then turn the engine off.

*[SV34700(ALL)01/93] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir.


340

[SV34800(ALL)10/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050163-A The power steering fluid cap

[SV34900(ALL)03/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in smallamounts, continuously checking the level, until the fluid isbetween the minimum (MIN) and maximum (MAX) lines onthe dipstick. Do not overfill.

[SV34950(ALL)10/93] 6. Make sure the cap is free of all dirt prior to re-installing toprevent pump damage.

*[SV35000(ALL)06/94] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford SpecificationESW-M2C33-F, such as Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid,E6AZ-19582-AA or an equivalent Type F Automatic TransaxleFluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digit numberbeginning with “2P” printed on the fluid container).

*[SV35100(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive yourvehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid.This can damage the power steering pump.

*[SV35200(ALL)01/93] If you must check the power steering fluid when it is cold,make sure that the fluid reaches at least the minimum (MIN)mark. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperatureis approximately 70˚ to 100˚F (21˚ to 38˚C).



341

[SV35300(ALL)10/93] Fuses and Maxi-Fuses

[SV35400(ALL)11/93] Fuses and maxi-fuses (high-current fuses) protect your vehicle’selectrical system from overloading. If electrical parts in yourvehicle are not working, the system may have been overloadedand caused a blown fuse. Before you replace or repair anyelectrical parts, check the appropriate fuses.

[SV35450(ALL)08/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050026-AFuse panel location

[SV35500(ALL)10/93] The following charts tell you which fuses protect each electricalpart of your vehicle. If a fuse blows (opens) a circuit, all theparts of your vehicle that use that circuit will not work.

[SV35600(ALL)11/93] Once you have determined which fuses to check, follow theprocedures under Checking and replacing fuses.

[SV35700(ALL)09/93] NOTE: Fuse links should only be repaired by your dealer.


342

%*[SV35800(ALL)05/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

*[SV35900(ALL)01/93] If you need to check a fuse, find the fuse panel for the electricalsystem, which is located under the instrument panel, and followthese steps:

*[SV36000(ALL)09/93] 1. To remove the fuse panel cover, pull down on the fuse panelcover handle.

[SV36100(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050027-AFuse puller tool location — fuse panel cover



343

[SV36200(ALL)10/93] 2. On the fuse panel, find the number of the fuse you want tocheck.

[SV36300(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050112-BMain fuse panel under instrument panel


344

[SV36325(ALL)08/94]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050110-F



345

[SV36350(ALL)08/94]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050111-E


346

[SV36375(ALL)11/93] 3. Use the fuse puller tool to remove the fuse.

[SV36400(ALL)03/94] 4. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clearside of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. Ifit is, the fuse is blown and should be replaced with a fuse ofthe correct amperage rating.

*[SV36500(ALL)09/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040210-B

Fuse puller tool and fuse



*[SV36800(ALL)01/93] 5. Put the fuse panel cover back on.

*[SV36850(ALL)05/93] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you donot find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues toblow, have your electrical system checked.



347

*[SV36900(ALL)03/94] The following chart indicates the colors and amperage ratings ofstandard fuses.

[SV36950(ALL)11/93]

fourteen pica

chart:0050113-B


348

%*[SV37000(ALL)01/93] Engine Compartment Main Fuse Panel

[SV37050(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050039-BEngine compartment main fuse panel located on driver’s side of enginecompartment

[SV37100(ALL)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0050114-CEngine compartment main fuse and relay panel



349

[SV37150(ALL)08/94]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050115-F


350


Always disconnect the battery before servicing highcurrent fuses.

*[SV37520(ALL)05/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by aqualified technician.


Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Boxbefore reconnecting the battery or refilling fluidreservoirs.

[SV37700(ALL)12/93] A blown maxi-fuse may be replaced but will continue to blowuntil the cause of the overload condition is corrected.



%*[SV38400(ALL)10/94] Relays

% [SV38500(ALL)03/94] Relays are devices which receive signals from components orsystems. After receiving signals, relays transfer these signals toactivate or deactivate other components or systems. One relaybox is located with the maxi-fuses near the battery and one islocated with the fuse panel under the instrument panel.



351

[SV38601(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050215-DThe relay box cover located under the instrument panel

[SV38700(ALL)02/95] Lights

*[SV38800(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lightsfrequently:

*[SV38900(ALL)01/95] ■ headlamps

*[SV39000(ALL)01/95] ■ tail lamps

*[SV39100(ALL)01/95] ■ brakelamps

*[SV39200(ALL)01/95] ■ hazard flasher

*[SV39300(ALL)01/95] ■ turn signals

*[SV39400(ALL)01/95] ■ license plate lamp

*[SV39450(ALL)02/95] ■ fog lamps


352

%*[SV39500(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if:

*[SV39600(ALL)01/95] ■ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off yourvehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beamson

*[SV39700(ALL)01/95] ■ the headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to seeclearly at night

*[SV39800(ALL)01/93] ■ the headlamp beams are not pointed slightly down and tothe right

%*[SV39900(ALL)03/95] Replacing the Headlamp Bulb

*[SV40000(ALL)01/93] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When thelamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the wholelamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep outof children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plasticbase and do not touch the glass. The oil from your handcould cause the bulb to break the next time theheadlamps are operated.

*[SV40200(ALL)01/93] Do not remove the burned out bulb unless you can immediatelyreplace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extendedperiod of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp and affectits performance.

*[SV40300(ALL)03/95] To remove the headlamp bulb:

*[SV40400(ALL)01/93] 1. Make sure that the engine is off and the headlamp switch onthe instrument panel is in the OFF position.

[SV40500(ALL)11/93] 2. Lift the hood and locate the headlamp bulb installed in therear of the headlamp. Remove the electrical connector fromthe bulb by pulling the connector away from the bulbassembly.



353

[SV40600(ALL)12/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050182-AHeadlamp bulb removal

[SV40700(ALL)11/93] 3. Squeeze the bulb retaining clip toward the bulb until itreleases. Keep the clip. You must use it again to hold thenew bulb in place.

*[SV40900(ALL)04/95] 4. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket bygently pulling it rearward without turning.

*[SV41000(ALL)01/93] 5. Do not touch the bulb with your skin or you could shatterthe bulb. Always grasp the bulb assembly from the plasticbase.

*[SV41100(ALL)01/93] 6. Be sure that you have the proper replacement bulb readybefore you discard the burned out bulb.


354

*[SV41300(ALL)03/95] To install a bulb:

*[SV41400(ALL)01/93] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward,insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You mayneed to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves inthe plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When thegrooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until theplastic base contacts the rear of the socket. Do not touch theglass with your fingers.

[SV41500(ALL)11/93] 2. Snap the retaining clip over the plastic base.

*[SV41600(ALL)01/93] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic baseuntil it snaps, locking it into place.

*[SV41700(ALL)09/89] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they workproperly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before youchanged bulbs, you should not need to align it again.

% [SV41800(ALL)10/93] Replacing the Taillamp Bulbs

[SV41820(ALL)10/93] To remove a bulb:

[SV41825(ALL)10/93] 1. Open the liftgate.

[SV41830(ALL)10/93] 2. Remove two screws along top edge of taillamp lens.

[SV41835(ALL)10/93] 3. Grasp lens with fingers at point B and pull side of lens outuntil snap attachment releases.



355

[SV41840(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0050177-A Taillamp lens removal

[SV41850(ALL)10/93] 4. Grasp lens along liftgate opening edge and pull straightrearward until snap attachment releases.

[SV41860(ALL)06/94] 5. Remove bulb and socket by twisting to unlock and pullingstraight out.

[SV41875(ALL)06/94] 6. Remove bulb from socket by pulling straight out fromsocket.

[SV41900(ALL)10/93] To install a taillamp bulb:

[SV41910(ALL)06/94] 1. Insert new bulb into socket by pushing bulb until it is lockedin position.

[SV41915(ALL)06/94] 2. Install socket into lamp by aligning socket to lamp andturning clockwise until locked in place.

[SV41920(ALL)06/94] 3. Align pins along liftgate edge with holes in body and snapattachment into retainer.

[SV41930(ALL)06/94] 4. Rock lens around on outer edge and snap in second snapattachment.

[SV41940(ALL)06/94] 5. Replace two screws along top edge of lens.


356

[SV42200(ALL)08/94]

33-1/2 pica

art:0050019-DLight bulb locations



357

[SV42250(ALL)06/94] Replacing The Fog Lamp Bulb

[SV42260(ALL)10/93] To remove a bulb:

[SV42265(ALL)06/94] 1. Disconnect wiring connector from lamp.

[SV42270(ALL)06/94] 2. Rotate bulb and socket to remove from lamp.

*[SV42275(ALL)03/95] To install a bulb:

[SV42280(ALL)06/94] 1. Install bulb and socket into lamp and rotate.

[SV42295(ALL)06/94] 2. Connect wiring connector to lamp.


358

%*[SV42300(ALL)01/93] Bulb replacement chart

% [SV42400(ALL)05/95]

twenty-eight pica

chart:0050116-E



359

%*[SV43100(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV43200(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter whichenables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emissionrequirements.

*[SV43300(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emissioncontrol parts continue to work properly:

*[SV43400(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV43500(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV43600(ALL)01/93] ■ Never turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving,especially at high speeds.

*[SV43700(ALL)03/95] ■ Have the services listed in your Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet performed according to the specified schedule.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.


Do not remove the floor carpet in your vehicle. Emissioncontrols cause high exhaust temperatures under the floor.


360


Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful andpotentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.Under extreme conditions excessive exhaust temperaturescould damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering,or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

*[SV43950(ALL)03/95] The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet are required because they areconsidered essential to the life and performance of your vehicleand to its emissions system.

*[SV44000(ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke and loss of oilpressure. Also watch for the charge warning light, the checkengine light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimesindicate that the emission system is not working properly.

*[SV44100(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle orengine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach theexhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV44200(ALL)01/93] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leasesvehicles, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is notpermitted to intentionally remove an emission control device orprevent it from working. In some of the United States and inCanada, vehicle owners may be liable if their emission controldevice is removed or is prevented from working.

%*[SV44225(ALL)05/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or service of the emissioncontrol devices or systems in your new Ford Motor Companyvehicle or engine may be performed at your expense by anyautomotive repair establishment or individual using automotiveparts equivalent to those with which your vehicle or engine wasoriginally equipped.



361

*[SV44235(ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacementparts. If other than Ford or Motorcraft parts or Ford authorizedremanufactured parts are used for maintenance replacements orfor the service of components affecting emission control, suchnon-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford MotorCompany parts in performance and durability. It is the owner’sresponsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Pleaseconsult your warranty booklet for complete warrantyinformation.

*[SV44250(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service yourvehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’splastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV44300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. Seeyour dealer if the engine runs on for more than five secondsafter you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

*[SV44400(ALL)11/93] Information about your vehicle’s emissions control system is onthe Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on ornear the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement andgives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV44450(ALL)05/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing

*[SV44460(ALL)05/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic(OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its batteryhas just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not readyfor I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the lawspecifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway drivingto complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all ofthe OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBDII system is set to the ready condition. The amount of drivingrequired to reach the ready condition varies with individualdriving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below.If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do theadditional driving required by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work.


362

*[SV44470(ALL)05/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

*[SV44481(ALL)04/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If steps 2through 9 are interrupted, repeat the preceeding step. Any safedriving mode is acceptable between steps.

*[SV44491(ALL)04/95] Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to trafficconditions and obey all traffic laws.

*[SV44500(ALL)04/95] 1. Start engine and drive until engine has reached normaloperating temperature.

*[SV44511(ALL)04/95] 2. Idle vehicle for at least 80 seconds, then accelerate at partthrottle to near 45 mph (70 km/h).

*[SV44521(ALL)04/95] 3. Drive to accumulate at least four (4) minutes in the range of30-45 mph (50-70 km/h). If stop and go conditions occur,the accumulative time must be within the 30-45 mph(50-70 km/h) range. No wide open throttle conditionsshould be encountered.

*[SV44531(ALL)04/95] 4. Cruise and maintain a select speed in the range of30-40 mph (50-65 km/h) on a level road with throttle heldvery steady for at least one (1) minute.

*[SV44541(ALL)04/95] 5. Decelerate and idle for at least 80 seconds.

*[SV44550(ALL)04/95] 6. Accelerate to 55 mph (90 km/h) at 1/2 throttle.

*[SV44560(ALL)04/95] 7. Decelerate at closed throttle for 10 seconds.



363

*[SV44570(ALL)04/95] 8. Cruise and maintain a select speed in the range of40-65 mph (65-105 km/h) on a level road with throttle heldvery steady for at least 80 seconds.

*[SV44580(ALL)04/95] 9. Complete 10 minutes of city driving 25-40 mph(40-65 km/h) with at least six (6) stops.

*[SV44590(ALL)04/95] 10. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can beturned off when convenient.

% [SV44670(ALL)02/95] Refill Capacities[SV44680(ALL)02/95]

eighteen pica

chart:0050068-E


364

%*[SV44700(ALL)01/93] Motorcraft Parts% [SV44800(ALL)04/95]

eighteen pica

chart:0050067-H



365

%*[SV44900(ALL)01/93] Lubricant Specifications% [SV45000(ALL)04/95]

twenty-two pica

chart:0050066-E


366

%*[SV45100(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV45200(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV45300(ALL)01/93] If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period oftime (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenancerecommendations to keep your vehicle in good operatingcondition.

*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV45500(ALL)01/93] ■ Store your vehicle in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] ■ Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV45700(ALL)01/93] ■ When your vehicle is stored outside, it will require regularmaintenance to protect against rust and damage.

*[SV45800(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV45900(ALL)01/93] ■ Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, taror mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housings andunderside of front fenders.

*[SV46000(ALL)01/95] ■ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.

*[SV46100(ALL)01/93] ■ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat ofauto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary whenyour vehicle is washed.

[SV46200(ALL)03/94] ■ Lubricate all hood, door and liftgate hinges and latches witha light grade oil.

*[SV46300(ALL)01/95] ■ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.



367

%*[SV46500(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV46600(ALL)01/93] ■ Start the engine every fifteen days. Run it at fast idle until itreaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV46700(ALL)01/93] ■ With your foot on the brake, shift the transaxle into all gearswhile the engine is running.

%*[SV46800(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV47000(ALL)07/94] ■ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the firstautomatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.


The fuel filter, fuel supply lines and engine aremaintained under pressure. This pressure must berelieved prior to servicing the fuel filter and enginecompartment connections in order to avoid the danger offuel spray.

*[SV47100(ALL)01/93] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days ormore), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers in the fuel systemand may also clog small orifices.

*[SV47200(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual orexpected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructionson the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speedto circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV47300(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system willprotect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Followthe instructions packaged with the product.


368


Fuel system components may be damaged by torches andwelding equipment.

%*[SV47400(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV47500(ALL)01/93] ■ Protect your vehicle against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV47600(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV47700(ALL)01/93] ■ Check and recharge the battery as necessary.

*[SV47800(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat ofgrease.

%*[SV47900(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV48000(ALL)01/93] ■ Make sure the brakes and parking brake are fully released.

%*[SV48100(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV48200(ALL)05/95] ■ Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV48300(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV48400(ALL)01/93] ■ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins underthe vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.

*[SV48500(ALL)01/93] ■ Lubricate working parts to prevent corrosion.


369

[QI01000(ALL)06/95]

full page art:0050273-A

Warning label locations


371

[QI0

2100(A

LL)06/9

4]

fullpage

art:0050001-C

Frontexterior

view

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

372

[QI0

2200(A

LL)08/9

3]

fullpage

art:0050002-B

Rear

exteriorview

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

373

[QI0

2300(A

LL)06/9

4]

fullpage

art:0050003-C

Entrance

view

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

374

[QI0

2400(A

LL)08/9

3]

fullpage

art:0050004-B

Driver’s

door

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

375

[QI0

2500(A

LL)04/9

5]

fullpage

art:0050005-F

Instrument

panel

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

376

[QI0

2601(A

LL)04/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

50

23

1-D

Mechanical

instrument

cluster

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

377

[QI0

2700(A

LL)03/9

5]

fullpage

art:0050007-G

Mechanical

instrument

clusterw

ithtachom

eter

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

378

[QI0

2750(A

LL)03/9

5]

fullpage

art:0050006-G

Electronic

instrument

cluster

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

379

[QI0

2800(A

LL)06/9

4]

fullpage

art:0050008-D

Rear

cargoarea

File:wnqis.ex

Upd

ate:Tue M

ar 19 14:45:17 1996

Index

381

AABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . 69, 88Accessory position on the ignition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Air bag supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . 19, 40

and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 39description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 85operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Air conditioning, manual heating andair conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Alarm, activating remote personal. . . . . . . . . . . . 152Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system). . . . . 128, 195Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241see also Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 88

Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Anti-theft system

arming the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156disarming an untriggered system . . . . . . . . . . . 157disarming a triggered system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157triggering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Assistance (see Customer assistance). . . . . . . . . . . 283

File:wnixs.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:12:49 1996

382

Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . 195Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . 123Autolock (see Keyless entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Automatic transaxle

driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363fluid, specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 325battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 85how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 84checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 365

Brakelamp, bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Brakes

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light . . . . . 69, 88applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 84fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 365front disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4


383

Index

Brakes (continued)noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244stopping distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Built-in child seat

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Bulbs, replacingheadlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) . . . 292Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . 39Cassette tape player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 213, 225, 228Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . 201Chains, tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 85Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 39attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50


384

Child safety seats (continued)automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 39built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chimeheadlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 83

Cleaning your vehiclebuilt-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37CD player and discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 184headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 335

Climate control systemair conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 216, 231Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . 196Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105


385

Index

Controls (continued)steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Coolant (see Engine coolant)drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 365temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 93

Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Cupholder(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . 284

DDashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Defrost

rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Dispute Settlement Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

door ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 90lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Driving under special conditionsbad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248high speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

EElectrical system

operating when the engine is off . . . . . . . . . . . . 55relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Electronic sound systematenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128


386

Electronic sound system (continued)radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 209, 226warranty and service information. . . . . . . . . . . 234

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . 225

Emergencies, roadsideassistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 325jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Emission control system

catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Enginecheck engine warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 86does not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321–322, 337specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Engine coolant temperature gauge, description . . . . . 78, 93Engine knocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Engine oil

changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317


387

Index

Engine oil (continued)disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 73, 89filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Entry systemilluminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154keyless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Exhaust fumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

FFederal Communications Commission . . . . . . . . . . 233Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Flashing the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Ford Extended Service Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . 292Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290French owner guides, how to obtain. . . . . . . . . . . . 3Fuel

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310filling your vehicle with fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 94improving fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310


388

Fuel (continued)quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367treating emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Fuel and distance computeraverage economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100engine/metric button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98instant economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98select button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98to empty indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100trip distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Fuel cap, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 94Fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Fuse panels, engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Fuses, checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

GGas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . . . . . . 310, 314Gauges, Mechanical

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . 78, 93fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 94odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 96speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 95tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236


389

Index

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Headlamps

autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Heating

manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . 106rear seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

High beams, indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 90Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

IIdentification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 285Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Ignition

positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Indicator lamp module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102


390

Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 39Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Instrument panel

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . 125location of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Integrated child seat (see Built-in child seat) . . . . . . . . 27Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

JJack

operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

KKeyless entry system

autolock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154locking and unlocking doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150programming entry code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Keyspositions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55removing from the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

LLamps

daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . 122dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


391

Index

Lamps (continued)illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . 129Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Lights, warning and indicator

air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 85anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 88anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 84charging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 85check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 86door ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 90hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 90low fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 91oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 89safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 83speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 142theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104traction control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 92

Load limits, trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Lug nuts

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Lumbar support pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

MMaintenance (see servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185


392

Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . 314Mirrors

automatic dimming rearview mirror . . . . . . . 144, 190heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

OOctane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 96trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . . . . . . . . 361Order forms, service information . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

PPanic alarm feature, remote entry system . . . . . . . . 152Parking brake

operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 84

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339driving with power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240


393

Index

RRadio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . . . . . . . 195Rear climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Refill capacities for fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Remote entry system

illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152replacement/additional transmitters . . . . . . . . . . 154replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 39

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

SSafe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . 312Safety restraints

center front lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 39lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9lap belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18


394

Safety restraints (continued)warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 39attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Seatschild safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184seat/bed conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Servicing your vehicle, precautions when servicing . . . . 301Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . 9Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Speed control

canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 95Starting your vehicle, preparing to start your vehicle . . . . 57Steering wheel

horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Storage compartments, map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . 185Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . . . . . . 74, 85Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . 19

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Tail lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints). . . . . . . 50


395

Index

Tirescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 335replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . 281Trailer towing, tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Transaxle, fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . 336Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Turn signal, indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 92

VVariable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

WWarning chimes, safety belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Warranties, radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid, reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Wheels

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 335inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Windshield washer fluid and wipers

checking and adding fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325checking and replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 327operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326


396

Service Station Information

[GS00200(ALL)02/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0050223-E

File:wngss.exUpdate:Tue Mar 19 08:12:42 1996

Documents

1996 Ford Windstar Owners Manual